JP2022162018A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.

SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, after performing a bet operation, rotation of respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R starts on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41. Then, the reels corresponding to operations of stop switches 42 to 44 stop, and a stop combination according to the lottery result is acquired. In addition, an AT mode is set in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is easily notified, and a lottery for shifting to the AT mode is executed at a predetermined trigger. The lottery for shifting to the AT mode may be restricted, and an imparting lottery as to whether or not to impart a privilege to the player according to the number of restrictions may be executed.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
means capable of updating specific information corresponding to the number of games executed in a predetermined specific state according to the progress of the game;
means capable of giving a privilege to a player when the specific information becomes special information corresponding to a predetermined specific number of games;
means capable of executing a determination process for terminating the specific state in the game executed in the specific state;
with
When the game result of the game executed in the specific state is a transition result that enables transition to a predetermined transition state, the specific information is not updated in the game until transition to the transition state. it is possible,
When the game result of the game executed in the specific state is the transition result, the determination process is not executed in the game until transition to the transition state,
It is characterized by comprising means capable of executing a specific notification in the game up to the transition to the transition state when the transition result is obtained.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB/RB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining main results of a lottery related to an instruction function and setting differences between winning probabilities; It is a figure which shows an example of the mode lottery table for display mode transition. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a figure which shows an example of a lottery table of the number of additional games. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure which shows an example of a back-up lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of a transition opportunity. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; It is a flow chart which shows AT mode lottery processing. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an overview of bonuses and CZs; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the CZ mode; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and bonus; 10 is a flow chart showing a process for setting a bonus winning notification effect; It is a flow chart which shows special information processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between CZ mode and bonus; 10 is a flow chart showing a setting process of a bonus winning notification effect in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a bonus in modified example 2; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing part of a lottery table for each RB state in modification 3; 14 is a flowchart showing RB effect processing in Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; In Modified Example 5, (a) is a diagram showing an example of an RB state lottery table, and (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the winning result and the number of games during RB. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an overview of bonuses in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for setting a bonus winning notification effect; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; It is a flow chart which shows AT mode lottery processing. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which AT winning notification is performed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which AT winning notification is performed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which AT winning notification is performed; FIG. FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which CZ mode end notification is given; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing winning result handling processing for a winning game in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of bonuses; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing AT mode lottery processing in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fall lottery table and an AT lottery table in modified examples 1 and 2; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a map table for CZ mode in modification 3;

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game that starts with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game that starts with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 41st small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and the right reel 32R has: A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the effective line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

A "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "black BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent downstream positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for the role. When the 41st minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state.

State transition wins in which only game state transitions are performed include first BB wins, second BB wins, RB wins, and CB wins.

When the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the first BB wins, and when the "white BAR" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. , it will be the 2nd BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Also, when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the RB wins. . When the RB prize is established, the game state shifts to the RB state. Then, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "watermelon" symbol, a "first replay" symbol, and a "black BAR" on the right reel 32R. When the symbols and stop on the active line, the CB prize is won. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern or a "white bell" pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a "white BAR" pattern, a "LUCKY" pattern, a "red 7" pattern, a "white bell" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" pattern, a "young man" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are provided via an input/output port 104. connected.

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, processing is performed to automatically insert 3 virtual medals, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 coin is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers in the state, RB state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has seven types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, an RB state, and a CB state. are set for each game state. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the BB state and the RB state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. Then, when the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the first BB, second BB, RB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV (IV=32 to 62) including any one of the first BB, second BB, RB, and CB results in an affirmative determination in step S305. If the determination in step S306 is affirmative, the corresponding bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, RB winning flag, CB winning flag) is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. I do. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag and the 33rd minor winning winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, the set winning flags are a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag), a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), and a winning flag that indicates that the RB has been won. If it is not one of the flags (RB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is one of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag and the RB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under the condition that the corresponding prize is established. That is, the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the RB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in the state in which the 1BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag and the RB winning flag are carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, the 2nd BB, RB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set. If a winning combination other than 1st BB, 2nd BB, RB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=33 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set without setting the 2nd BB winning flag. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set. Then, in a state where the RB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV is 51, the RB winning flag is not set, and the 27th minor win flag and the 33rd minor win flag are set. Set the winning flag.

A lottery table in which any one of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag and the RB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and any one of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag and the RB winning flag is carried over. In this state, the lottery process may be performed using the separately prepared lottery table. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the first BB, second BB, RB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=17) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=18) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) are about 1/43.7, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=25 to 28) is about 1/21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=34) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=35 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=40 to 43) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=44, 45) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 47) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the strong cherry stack 3 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the weak cherry stack 3 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 3 and the weak watermelon overlap 3 (probability of winning at IV = 52, 53) is about 1/13100, respectively, and it is possible to win the chance A overlap 3 and chance B overlap 3. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV=54 and 55) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the middle bell overlap 3 (probability of winning when IV=56) is about 1/13100. The probability of being elected to the special rep A duplicate 3 (probability of being elected when IV = 57) is about 1/1010, and the probability of being elected to the special rep AB duplicate 3 (winning when IV = 58) probability) is about 1 in 1310. The probability of winning the first BB, the second BB, and the RB alone (the probability of winning when IV=59 to 61) is about 1/65500. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=62) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.96.

Note that 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 12, 29 to 31, and 63 in the normal game state lottery table. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when the special reply A overlap 3 is won and the stop pattern information corresponding to the ninth replay and RB winning is set, the ninth replay winning is established with priority over the RB winning. Set priorities. Then, for example, in a situation where the RB winning is carried over, if the normal replay is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the RB winning and the first replay winning is set, the first replay is performed rather than the RB winning. The order of priority is set so that prizes are preferentially established.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M for the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle row. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. The stop pattern information is set so that the pattern with a smaller number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=21 to 28, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, sandwich push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the ninth “second replay” symbol to the thirteenth “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the 2nd "LUCKY" pattern or the 6th "white bell" pattern stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 reaches the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop downstairs. The combination of "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” pattern stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol (the "first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. It is one of a case where a prize is established, a case where a ninth minor winning combination is established, and a case where the transition rolls are stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins are established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins are established, the re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the activated line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. When the second replay winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line under a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S503. , the first RT setting flag is set, and this processing ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 63 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 , when IV=1 is won, normal replay is won, and when IV=2 is won, first promotion replay 1 is won, and IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If you do, you will win the first promotion replay 4. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation sequences. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV=11 to 63 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning when IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/13.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/15.5, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/8.90. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination of loose stitches, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination of red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye stops and the fourth replay win is established, or the red 7・The red 7 and black BAR middle stop symbol combination is stopped, and the 4th replay win is established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. and terminate this process. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the RT state processing is terminated as it is.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1-8, 13-63 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV=9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, The 7 re-game winning, the 8th re-game winning, and the 3 re-game winning to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 62, and "65536" is set as the point value for IV=63. (Refer to FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small/medium combination (the probability of winning when IV=63) is 1/1, and an event of losing does not occur. In addition, it is good also as a structure which a partial disconnection generate|occur|produces. Also, a plurality of types of CB small and medium winnings may be provided, and the winning small winnings and the number of payouts (privileges) at the time of winning may be different.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, even if the CB medium and small combination is won, some kind of small combination winning is always established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 . Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination, 31st minor winning combination, 36th minor winning combination to 38th minor winning combination are established. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning are established, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables the execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ) may be provided.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

Then, when any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. After that, in step S612, 270 is set in the remaining payout number counter and 270 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and none of the BB winnings has been established, it is determined in step S613 whether or not the RB winning has been established. Then, when the RB prize is established, the RB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S614, and the RB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S615. do. After that, in step S616, 90 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 90 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S616 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the RB state, and the RB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value have been paid out in the RB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB/RB state lottery table is displayed. select. Further, the game state shifts to the RB state by performing the processing of steps S614 to S616. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the RB state based on the fact that the RB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB/RB state lottery table is displayed. select.

FIG. 28 is a lottery table for BB/RB states selected in the BB state transitioning to the first BB or the second BB or the RB state transitioning to the RB. In the BB/RB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 28 and 32 to 63, and "65516" is set as the point value PV for IV=29. =30 and 31 point values PV are set to "10". Therefore, in the BB state or RB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB/RB (probability of winning when IV=29) is about 1/1.00, and the second role in BB/RB is about 1/1.00. The probability of winning the 3rd role among BB and RB (probability of winning when IV = 30, 31) is about 1/6560, and there is no event of losing. In addition, it is good also as a structure which a partial disconnection generate|occur|produces.

The winning probabilities of the 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand are the winning probabilities common to the 1st BB, the 2nd BB and the RB. In addition, the winning probability of the 1st hand in BB, the 2nd hand in BB, and the 3rd hand in BB is the same winning probability regardless of the timing of transition to BB state of 1BB or 2nd BB, or the timing of transition to RB state. For example, the 1st role in BB/RB in the 1st BB based on 1 win in the special reply A, the 1st role in BB/RB in the 2nd BB based on the 2 wins in the special reply AB, and the special The probability of winning is the same as BB in RB based on 3 duplicate winnings of Lip A and the first hand in RB.

FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the 1st role in BB/RB is won, any of the 1st, 39th, and 40th minor role wins regardless of the operation order and timing of the stop switches 42-44. is always established. In addition, the ninth regame winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, when the second winning combination is won in BB and RB, the ninth re-game winning is established without fail regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

In the third combination of BB and RB that enables the ninth replay win and the tenth replay win, which replay win is established depends on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When the stop operation of 44 is performed, if any prize can be won, stop drive control is performed so that the replay with the smaller number of slips wins. More specifically, the combination of symbols for winning the ninth replay and tenth replay is common to both the "first replay" symbol and the "second replay" symbol for both the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. However, the left reel 32L is different. That is, on the left reel 32L, the target symbols for the ninth replay are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols for the tenth replay are the "youth" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. .

For example, in a 3-bet game, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the upper row, the ninth replay is performed. Both the seventh "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol, and the eighth "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol of the tenth replay, can be stopped at the upper stage on the activated line. In this case, stop drive control is performed so as to stop the 7th "red bell" symbol with a small number of slips on the upper stage. As a result, the ninth re-game win can be established instead of the tenth re-game win. In addition, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 12th "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage on the left reel 32L, the 13th "youth The ninth re-game is set so that the ninth re-game is more likely to win than the 10th re-game, for example, the 12th 'white bell' symbol is driven and controlled to stop at the upper stage instead of the ' symbol. In other words, if the 10th replay is to be won, the 0th "Youth" symbol, the 8th "Watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "Youth" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform the stop operation of the stop switch 42, and if it is other timing, the ninth regame winning will be established.

Since BB state and RB state are 3-bet games, the 1st hand win is won in BB/RB. Medals are paid out. Also, when the second combination is won in BB/RB, the ninth re-game win is established, and even when the third combination is won in BB/RB, the ninth re-game win is established in most cases. In other words, in the BB/RB state, either the bell winning such as the first small combination or the replay winning as the ninth replay is frequently established. When a replay win is established, no medals are paid out, but a replay is given, and the next game can be played without medals. In the BB state and the RB state, there is no misalignment, so it can be said that the BB state and the RB state are game states in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S613 and neither BB winning nor RB winning has been established, processing for setting a carryover command is performed in step S617. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it known that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game and a so-called carry-over state has occurred, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

As already explained, winning other bonuses is restricted in games played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), when winning a double combination with the bonus of IV=32 to 62 (1st BB, 2nd BB, RB, CB), etc., these bonuses The corresponding win flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small combination of IV = 32 to 62 or a duplicate combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state, BB state or RB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S618. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag, the BB setting flag or the RB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag and RB setting flag are cleared, an end flag indicating that the BB state and RB state have ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S618, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or RB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize or RB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag or RB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state or RB state ends, even if the 1st BB prize is established under the 2nd RT state, the normal game state cannot be entered. becomes. When transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 180 (=9×30−3×30) medals until the BB state ends. Then, when shifting to the RB state, the player can expect an increase of about 60 (=9×10−3×10) medals until the RB state ends.

Incidentally, in the BB state or the RB state, when the 2nd combination of BB/RB or the 3rd combination of BB/RB is won and a replay is given, the remaining payout counter is not decremented. In other words, the number of times the player wins the 2nd BB/RB hand or the 3rd BB/RB hand in the BB or RB state does not affect the number of medals that can be expected in the BB or RB state. On the other hand, the number of times the 2nd BB/RB hand or the 3rd BB/RB hand is won in the BB or RB state affects the number of games executed in the BB or RB state, The number of games to be executed in the BB state or RB state increases by the number of times the player wins the 2nd hand or the 3rd hand in BB/RB.

If none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, RB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), any of the first BB winning, second BB winning, RB winning, and CB winning is not established and the carry-over command is set (when the process of step S617 is executed); If the end determination process is performed in step S606, the state command is set. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the gaming state is the BB state or the RB state, the BB state ends when the number of paid out medals in the BB state reaches 270, and the RB state ends when the number of paid out medals in the RB state reaches 90. The game ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the transition roll on the effective line, the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established, and the RB prize is won. is established, the game state shifts to the RB state. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the state does not shift from the normal game state to the second RT state to the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third replay win is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, so the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state.

In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag or RB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag or RB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag or RB winning flag is carried over, the game state is normal. When a corresponding BB prize or RB prize is established in a game in which each BB win flag or RB win flag is set, the game state shifts to the BB state or RB state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning or RB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag or RB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag or RB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state is changed. When a corresponding BB prize or RB prize is established in a game in which each BB winning flag or RB winning flag is set after shifting to a normal game state, the game state shifts to a BB state or RB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning or RB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag or RB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag or RB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state is changed. When a corresponding BB prize or RB prize is established in a game in which each BB winning flag or RB winning flag is set after shifting to a normal game state, the game state shifts to a BB state or RB state.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages seven types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, the RB state, and the CB state. , CZ mode (chance zone mode), AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (pseudo bonus mode), and BB/RB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB/RB mode is a display mode that shifts when the 1st BB prize, the 2nd BB prize or the RB prize is established, and ends when the BB state or RB state ends. That is, the BB/RB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state and the RB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB/RB mode, if it corresponds to the shift to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 180 medals, and if it corresponds to the shift to the RB state. For example, the player can expect an increase of about 60 medals.

When the mode is shifted from the normal mode or the CZ mode to the BB/RB mode, a lottery for transition to the CZ mode and a lottery for transition to the AT mode may be performed in the BB/RB mode. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, shift to AT mode after BB/RB mode ends, and shift to CZ mode if lottery is won, shift to CZ mode after BB/RB mode ends. do. If you don't win any transition lottery, you may transition to normal mode after BB/RB mode ends, or transition to the mode you were staying in before transitioning to BB/RB mode such as CZ mode. . When the AT mode is shifted to the BB/RB mode, the AT mode is restored after the BB/RB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB/RB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB/RB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "pressing order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In normal mode, a lottery for transition to CZ mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is won, the normal mode shifts to the CZ mode. The normal mode does not shift to the AT mode or VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the 1st RT state, it can be expected that about 1.59 medals will be reduced each time one game is played, and the game state at that time will be the 2nd RT state to the 2nd RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The CZ mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, as in the normal mode. In CZ mode, a lottery for transition to AT mode is performed. In other words, the CZ mode is set as a mode in which the shift to the AT mode is possible although the operation order is not notified in the same manner as in the normal mode. If the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, the CZ mode shifts to the AT mode. When the CZ mode ends without winning the transition lottery, the CZ mode is shifted to the normal mode. CZ mode does not shift to VB mode.

The CZ mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the CZ mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the winning order is replayed, so it is rare to shift from the 2nd RT state to the 3rd RT state, and corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. It will be done. In the CZ mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the 1st RT state, it can be expected that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time will be the 2nd RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. AT mode is different from ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. It is composed of four AT modes out of four modes, and any AT mode has a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the normal mode. When the lottery for shifting to VB mode is won, the AT mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the AT mode shifts to the normal mode.

ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. The 4 modes are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode is determined by the ATLV. 4 mode is the highest, ATLV. 1 mode is set to be the lowest, and ATLV. 1 mode, ATLV. 2 mode, ATLV. 3 mode, ATLV. The order of the 4 modes is set so that the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode increases.

The AT mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. 44 correspond to the second RT state to the third RT state. In the AT mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state to the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the AT mode continues at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the AT mode.

The VB mode, like the AT mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the AT mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the AT mode the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the reported operation order. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the 1st RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the 2nd RT state or the 2nd RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the transition of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the CZ mode, shift from the CZ mode to the AT mode, and return from the AT mode to the normal mode. . In the AT mode, a lottery for switching to the VB mode is performed, so if a loop occurs in which the AT mode is switched to the VB mode, and then the VB mode is returned to the AT mode, the player expects an increase in the number of owned medals. can.

As described above, when the normal mode and the CZ mode are compared, the normal mode does not shift to the AT mode, and the CZ mode is set so that a lottery for shifting to the AT mode can be won. Therefore, the CZ mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the AT mode is expected.

Also, in AT mode, ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. Four modes are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode differs in each AT mode. When shifting from normal mode or CZ mode to AT mode, basically ATLV. 1 mode. ATLV. 1 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and ATLV. A lottery for transition to 2 modes is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 2 mode, ATLV. 2 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. ATLV. 2 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and ATLV. A lottery for transition to 3 modes is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 3 modes, ATLV. 3 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. And ATLV. 3 mode, a lottery for switching to VB mode is performed, and ATLV. A lottery for transition to the 4 mode is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 4 mode, ATLV. 4 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased.

Therefore, when shifting to AT mode, ATLV. 1 mode→ATLV. 2 mode→ATLV. 3 mode→ATLV. By promoting the 4 mode and the AT mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode increases, and a loop between the AT mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the AT mode, VB mode, and BB/RB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, a RB state, and a CB state are alternated according to the winning of each replay or the stoppage of transitional results. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the AT mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is announced, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode transition lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S312) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31 .

In step S701, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and the mode is shifted to the AT mode. A flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. This is a flag that is cleared in special zones (except when shifting to BB/RB mode). When a negative determination is made in step S701, the first special combination process is executed in step S702.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first special win process is performed means that the AT mode is not won, and the display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the CZ mode. In the first special winning process, a shift lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the CZ mode, and a shift lottery to determine whether to shift to the AT mode.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the CZ mode. When not in the CZ mode means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is acquired as a table for CZ mode lottery from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S802. In the normal table, the probability of transition to the CZ mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery is set differently depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. It is

As shown in FIG. 37, the game results that trigger the mode transition lottery are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlapping 1, weak. Cherry Duplication 1, Strong Watermelon Duplication 1, Weak Watermelon Duplication 1, Chance A Duplication 1, Chance B Duplication 1, Middle Bell Duplication 1, Special Lip A Duplication 1, Special Lip A Duplication 2, Special Lip A Duplication 3, Single 1st BB , a single second BB, and a single RB are set (hereinafter collectively referred to as a “transition trigger”). These transition triggers have the same point value PV set regardless of the set value, and there is no set difference in winning probability. Also, the winning probability of each mode transition lottery is set so that there is no setting difference. On the other hand, strong cherry overlap 2, weak cherry overlap 2, strong watermelon overlap 2, weak watermelon overlap 2, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 2, middle bell overlap 2, special reply AB overlap 1, special reply AB overlap 2, strong cherry overlap 3, weak cherry overlap 3, strong watermelon overlap 3, weak watermelon overlap 3, chance A overlap 3, chance B overlap 3, middle bell overlap 3, special reply AB overlap 3, setting difference in winning probability The point value PV is set so that setting 1 generally has the lowest winning probability and setting 6 has the highest winning probability. called). Each mode transition lottery is not carried out for the non-trigger role with a setting difference in the winning probability. In other words, the mode transition lottery is performed with no set difference in the probability of winning in the transition trigger role having the same appearance rate, and the transition rate of each mode transition is the same.

In the lottery table for transition to the CZ mode acquired in step S802, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the transition trigger role. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, in the normal table, if the transition trigger is a strong cherry, there is a 15% probability that the CZ mode transition lottery will be won, and if it is a weak cherry, there is a 3% probability. , and the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery.

After acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table in step S802, the CZ mode lottery process is executed in step S803. In this process, the lottery counters are obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table obtained in step S802, thereby performing the lottery for transition to the CZ mode.

Incidentally, in the lottery for transition to CZ mode in step S803 in this embodiment, the lottery for transition to CZ mode is implemented in the carryover state in which any bonus winning flag is carried over and during any bonus state. It is restricted, more specifically, it is set so as not to win the lottery for transition to CZ mode. That is, in the game after any one of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag and the RB winning flag is set, no winning is made in the lottery for transition to the CZ mode, and if the display mode is the BB/RB mode, does not win the lottery for transition to CZ mode.

In step S804, based on the result of processing in step S803, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the CZ mode has been won. If the lottery for switching to the CZ mode is not won, the first special combination processing is terminated as it is. If the lottery for switching to the CZ mode is won, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed in step S805. After that, in steps S806 to S809, processing for setting the portent mode is performed. The omen mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that you have won the CZ mode, etc., is likely to occur, and after each game in the omen mode, you will be notified that you have won the CZ mode, etc. . The portent mode continues from 0 game to 32 games, and the number of games to be played in the portent mode is set to differ depending on the type of winning CZ mode or the like and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. In this embodiment, when the CZ mode or the like is won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus is performed after passing through the sign mode, and the CZ mode or the like is won after the bonus state ends. Information will be provided. Further, when the number of portent games is set to 0 games, winning notification is performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S806, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 39, in the predictive game number table, the number of predictive games to be selected is set differently depending on the current display mode, the transition winning display mode, and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode, and when the CZ mode is won, if the bonus is not simultaneously won, 90% of games 1 to 5 are selected, and 6 games are selected. Games ~ 10 games are selected at 10%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the CZ mode and the bonus are won at the same time, the 0 game omen mode is selected at 100%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select a shorter predictive game number when the bonus is simultaneously won than when the bonus is not simultaneously won, and the bonus and the CZ mode are performed at the same time. If the game is won, the sign mode is not set (the sign mode of 0 games is set), and the winning announcement is made without going through the sign mode. The portent mode is set not only when the CZ mode is won in the normal mode, but also when the AT mode is won in the CZ mode and when the VB mode is won in the AT mode. is also set so that the 0 game precursor mode is selected.

In step S807, based on the predictive game number table obtained in step S806 and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a lottery process for the number of games in the current predictive mode is performed. Then, in step S808, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends, and winning notification of winning a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like is performed.

In step S809, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes information on the result of the lottery that triggered the portent mode (the display mode to be shifted after the portent mode) and the number of portent games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S809, the first special combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S801 that the CZ mode is in progress, the process advances to step S810 to acquire a CZ mode table as a table for AT mode lottery from the various table storage area 105a. In the CZ mode table, the probability of shifting to the AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination).

The AT mode transition lottery process (step S811) using the CZ mode table will be described in detail later, but the outline of the CZ mode table will be described first. In the CZ mode table, as shown in FIG. 38, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the transition trigger role. For example, in the CZ mode table, if the transition trigger is a strong cherry, there is a 45% probability that the AT mode transition lottery will be won, and if it is a weak cherry, there will be a 15% probability that the AT mode transition lottery will be won. , and the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

After executing the AT mode lottery process in step S811, it is determined in step S812 whether or not the result of the AT mode lottery process is AT mode winning. If the AT mode is not won, the first special combination processing is terminated.

If the AT mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the AT mode that has been won this time is the SAT mode. The SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through a special zone for adding on. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal AT mode is 50, in the SAT mode the AT mode is started with the number of games added to the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the special zone for addition. . Therefore, the normal AT mode and the SAT mode have different advantages for the player, and the SAT mode is more advantageous for the player than the AT mode.

The lottery for transition to SAT mode is executed when a lottery for transition to AT mode is won (when a lottery for transition to AT mode is won in step S811). Based on the transition lottery table for As shown in FIG. 38, the transition lottery table for the SAT mode has a 25% probability of winning the lottery to transition to the AT mode triggered by, for example, a strong watermelon. In order to win the SAT mode, it is set so that 12.5% of the cases where the strong watermelon is won in the CZ mode will shift to the AT mode, and 12.5% will shift to the SAT mode.

If it is determined in step S813 that the SAT mode has been won, then in step S814 a process of setting a special zone winning flag is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S813, or after the process of step S814 is executed, in step S815, a process of setting an AT mode winning flag is performed. That is, when the AT mode is won, the AT mode winning flag is set, and in some of them (when the SAT mode is won), the specialized zone winning flag is set.

After the process of step S815 is performed, the process for setting the portent mode is performed in steps S806 to S809, and then the first special combination process is terminated. As described above, 0 games are set in the omen mode in the case of winning the AT mode or SAT mode (FIG. 39).

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not either the VB mode winning flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. The VB mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the VB mode, is set when shifting to the VB mode, and is cleared when the VB mode ends. If a negative determination is made in step S703, then in step S704 a second special combination process is executed. Further, when the determination in step S703 is affirmative, in step S705, the third special combination process is executed.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The AT mode corresponds to the case where the second special combination process is performed. In the second special winning process, a transition lottery is performed as to whether or not the display mode should be shifted to the VB mode or the additional special zone. Note that the zone specializing in addition indicates a state in which the number of continuous games in the AT zone is increased with a high probability over a plurality of games. In addition, in the second special winning process, an AT mode level promotion lottery is performed, and a process for increasing the number of continuous AT mode games is performed.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not any bonus carry-over state or any bonus state is in effect. If it is in the carryover state or in the bonus state, the second special combination processing is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, during the bonus carry-over state or the bonus state, the VB mode transition lottery, the AT mode level promotion lottery, the additional lottery, and the like are not performed. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, a process of grasping the AT mode level is performed. As already explained, in this embodiment, ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. Four AT mode levels of four modes are provided, and each level has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S902, the current AT mode level is ATLV. 1 mode to ATLV. 4 modes are determined.

In step S903, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level ascertained in step S902 is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. Also, in the VB mode lottery table for each level, the probability of transition to the VB mode is different as a whole, and ATLV. 1 mode rather than ATLV. The ATLV. ATLV.2 than that of 2 mode. The ATLV.3 mode has a higher transition probability to the VB mode. ATLV. The four modes are set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher.

In step S904, the table acquired in step S903 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S904 corresponds to VB mode winning. In the present embodiment, when a VB mode shift lottery is performed with a double combination as a bonus as a shift trigger, the VB mode shift lottery is not won. In other words, the overlap between the transition to the BB/RB mode and the transition to the VB mode is avoided as much as possible, so that the advantages of overlapping roles with these bonuses do not become too high.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S906. After that, in steps S907 to S910, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, in step S907, a precursor game number table is acquired, in step S908, the number of precursor games is drawn, and in step S909, the number of precursor games is set. End the role process. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the number of premonitory games is set to 0 for all VB mode wins in the AT mode. Therefore, if the VB mode is won during the AT mode, the winning notification will be made in the next game.

If it is determined in step S905 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S911. Steps S911 to S914 are processes for upgrading the AT mode level.

In step S911, an AT mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105 a of the ROM 105 and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . A plurality of promotion lottery tables are provided according to the AT mode level. 1 mode table, ATLV. 2 mode table, ATLV. Tables for 3 modes and a total of 3 (a promotion lottery is not performed while staying in ATLV.4 mode) are provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Also, in the table for each AT mode, ATLV. ATLV.1 rather than the table for 1 mode. The ATLV. ATLV. The table for 3 modes is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the AT mode level is promoted, it is set so that it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next level.

In step S912, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S911 was promotion winning. In the case of promotion winning, AT mode promotion processing is performed in step S913. In this processing, the level flags provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten to a level flag one level higher than the level flag corresponding to the current AT mode level. Thereafter, in step S914, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command includes information on the AT mode to be promoted. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the AT mode of the level to be promoted. As an effect for the AT mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, different background color effects are set according to the level of the AT mode. In addition to notifying that the level has been promoted, control is performed so that the background color for the AT mode is performed in accordance with the level of the destination of the promotion.

If it is determined in step S912 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S914 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous AT mode games is performed in steps S915 to S929.

That is, in step S915, lottery processing for adding the number of AT mode games is performed. In such an additional lottery process, a table for AT mode additional lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, the AT mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is set so that the push order bell or the push order replay will trigger the lottery. As shown in FIG. 37, for the push order bell and push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role"), a common point value PV is set regardless of the setting value, and is set as the winning probability. There is no difference. Also, the odds of winning the lottery for adding the number of games, which is triggered by the winning order, and the number of games to add to the number of games at the time of winning are set so that there is no setting difference. In other words, there is no setting difference in the additional performance triggered by the pushing order. In the following description, the combination that triggers the lottery related to the instruction function, including the transition trigger combination, is also referred to as a specific combination.

As shown in FIG. 41, among the specific combinations, the odds of winning the number-of-games addition lottery in the AT mode are set lower for the pushing combination than for the shift trigger combination. Therefore, it is expected that the number of games in the AT mode will be increased in the case where the shift opportunity role appears rather than the case where the winning role appears as a result of the lottery for each game. Then, it is considered that the player advances the game on the premise that he/she expects to win the transition opportunity role. On the other hand, the pushing order combination has a higher winning probability in each game than the transition opportunity combination, and can be said to be a game result that appears relatively easily. By adopting such a combination, it is possible to reduce the presence of the winning combination as an additional opportunity combination and increase the degree of surprise when an additional combination occurs. In addition, the chances of these additional performances based on the winning combination being performed are such that they can realistically occur during the AT mode (more specifically, if the initial number of games of 50 is played 2 to 3 times, they will occur once). appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to favorably generate an unexpected addition, such as an addition triggered by the above-described pushing-in order.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S917 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S918, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the AT mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of AT mode added games is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 40, the AT mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the high cherry game, 20 to 200 games are added to the AT mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In step S919, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous AT mode games (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S918. Perform addition processing. In the following step S920, an addition notification process for notifying that the addition lottery has been won and the number of games is performed.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in the slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of addition notification are set when an increase in the number of continuous games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following description, also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and in the case of performing an additional notification in which the game is later than the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (In the following description, " (Also referred to as "post-boarding notification") is set.

In the instant addition notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred means, for example, a case in which a sign mode or a continuous effect occurs in response to a game in which an addition has occurred. A series of games is defined as a series of games that can be continued over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition occurred. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the AT mode. This is different from the series of games in the immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the immediate boarding notification is for notifying a part of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG), and the post-boarding notification is for the remaining games in the AT mode, etc. The number will be reported later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) is It is equal to the total value of the display remaining number counter HG and the post-adding counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being executed. When this is the case, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the post-addition notification, it is reported that the number of games corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the reported amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the post-addition report to the remaining game on the auxiliary display section 65. The number display ZGP also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

In this way, when the extra winning is selected, a difference can occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). In the slot machine 10, the add-on counter BG is referred to when the add-on win is made, and whether the add-on notification is selected or the immediate add-on notification is selected depends on the current value of the add-on counter BG.

In the above-described addition notification processing in step S920, the game for which the addition notification is to be performed is set, and when the addition notification is to be performed in the game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 34, first, in step S1001, a process of grasping the trailing counter BG of the various counter areas 106e is performed. In subsequent step S1002, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the current addition notification should be a post-addition notification or an immediate addition notification. In the notification game lottery process, a post-loading lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not post-loading notification is to be performed according to the value of the post-boarding counter BG grasped in step S1001.

As shown in FIG. 43, the add-on lottery table is set so that the probability of selecting the add-on notification is different depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the add-on win. there is For example, at the time of addition triggered by a strong cherry, if the subsequent addition counter BG is less than 30, the subsequent addition notification is selected at 20% (the immediate addition notification is selected at 80%). When the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 10%, and when the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, the add-on notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the add-on counter BG is large. It is set so that the selection rate of the post-boarding notification becomes lower as the number increases.

In addition, as the type of specific role that triggered the additional winning, there are various types of rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) with relatively low winning probability such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. So-called normal roles (high-probability trigger result, high-probability result) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push-order replay and various push-order bells, have a higher pick-up selection rate when the pick-up counter BG value is small. is set. More specifically, in notification game lottery processing triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the post-addition notification is selected with a probability of 100%.

As described above, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the addition notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, basically, as the AT mode game progresses, the value of the post-addition counter BG often increases, and conversely, at the beginning of the AT mode game, the value of the post-addition counter BG is 0 or small. likely to be a value.

That is, when an additional winning is made in the early stages of the AT mode game, the probability that the subsequent addition notification is selected is high, especially when an additional winning is triggered by a normal combination that is not a rare combination such as a push order replay or a push order bell. If it is the early stages of the AT mode, the subsequent notification is always selected. As a result, after the AT mode is started, the trailing counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early.

After executing the notification game lottery process in step S1002, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional winning game is not won and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S1004, processing is performed to add the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S1005, notification timing setting processing is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing in the current game the additional notification is to be performed.

In one game, the addition notification is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of addition games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 44, as the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of the stop operation of the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of how the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released from the hand and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the addition notification execution timing table, when the number of games to be added is relatively small, for example, 5 games to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively easier to be selected.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur when the stop OFF operation is performed than when the stop ON operation of each reel is performed. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the stop operation of the second reel is second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation.

In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S1005, the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table of the addition notification. After that, the process for addition notification is terminated. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified in the current game as an immediate addition notification, and the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed following the addition notification processing. It is set as an add-on command in the add-on command setting process (step S921). The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including these information sets the add-on notification effect based on these information. This processing will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1007, after performing the process of setting the post-add flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the add-on notification process is terminated.

The post-boarding flag is set by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to indicate that the post-boarding notification should be performed when the value of the post-boarding counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. It is a flag for grasping. Further, in this case, in the addition command setting processing executed subsequent to the addition notification processing, information indicating that the addition notification will not occur in the current game is set in the addition command. The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including this information performs control so that the add-on notification is not generated in the current game.

Returning to the description of the second special combination process (FIG. 33), after the addition notification process is executed in step S920, an addition command including the processing result of the addition notification process is sent to the display control device 81 in step S921. After performing the process of setting it as an output target, the process of the second special combination ends.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S917, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, the AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the AT mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode add-on flag is set, the AT mode is added on at the end of the bonus.

If it is determined in step S916 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S923. In step S923, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, when a player wins a special role in the AT mode and does not win a lottery for transition to the VB mode or a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode, etc., a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is performed. In the special zone lottery process, a special zone transfer lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. conduct. As shown in FIG. 38, the specialized zone transfer lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the transfer lottery differs depending on the type of the transition opportunity role among the specific roles. As already explained, among the transition trigger roles that overlap with the bonus, while it is not possible to win the VB mode transition lottery, as shown in FIG. It is set so that the lottery for adding numbers will always be won (with a probability of 100%). Therefore, the special zone transfer lottery will not be performed with the overlapping roles with these bonuses as a trigger, and the special zone transfer lottery will be at the time of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry that does not overlap with the bonus, It is set so that the player can win the lottery for transition to the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games when the player does not win the lottery. For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of 0.5%. On the other hand, in the special zone transfer lottery based on the strong watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 15%, and in the special zone transfer lottery based on the weak watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 5%.

In step S924, based on the result of the process in step S923, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. If the player has won, in step S925, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. Then, in step S926, a process for acquiring a precursor game number table is performed, in step S927, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S928, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed, and in step S929, a precursor command is executed. is set, the second special combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S926 to S929 are similar to the processes of steps S907 to S910, for example, and are processes for setting the portent mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S924 and no lottery for transition to VB mode, lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode, or lottery for transition to specialized zone is not won, pseudo-addition notification is performed in step S930. After performing the processing, the second special combination processing is terminated. The pseudo-additional notification process is a process for sustaining the sense of expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination process executed in step S705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

AT mode or VB mode corresponds to the case where the third special winning process is performed. In the third special winning process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode and a lottery for transition to a specialized zone are performed.

That is, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not any bonus carry-over state or any bonus state is in effect. If it is in the carryover state or in the bonus state, the third special combination processing is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, during the bonus carry-over state or during the bonus state, the AT mode extra lottery or the like is not performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, lottery processing for adding the number of AT mode games is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S915. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S915 and the lottery process in step S1102.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1102 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1104 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1105 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the AT mode. In step S1106, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. , ends the third special combination processing. The processing of steps S1104 to S1108 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S921. Note that the number of additional games may differ between the lottery process in step S917 and the lottery process in step S1105.

If a negative determination is made in step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1110. In step S1110, a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is executed. In other words, even if a special winning combination is won in the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is not won, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S923, and is performed based on the table for the specialized zone transfer lottery (FIG. 38). The processing of steps S1111 to S1117 is the same as the processing of steps S924 to S930. Also, if it is determined in step S1104 that the bonus winning flag is set, the AT mode addition flag is set in step S1108, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After any one of steps S702, S704 and S705 has been executed, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the result of the lottery process this time was a push order replay or a push order win for the push order bell. . In the case of winning the pushing first hand, the pushing first hand process is executed in step S707. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S706, or if the process of step S707 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S708. In step S708, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As described above, after the specialized zone winning flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the SAT mode or the lottery for transition to the specialized zone, the transition to the specialized zone occurs. This is a flag that is set when the player wins (when the 7th regame win is established). If the special zone flag is set in step S708, special zone processing is executed in step S709. When a negative determination is made in step S708, or after the process of step S709 is executed, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zone>
The specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special zone processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not any bonus carry-over state or any bonus state is in progress. If it is in the carryover state or in the bonus state, the processing for the specialized zone is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, during the bonus carry-over state or during the bonus state, the AT mode extra lottery or the like is not performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, the result of the current lottery process is grasped. In the subsequent step S1203, AT mode add-on game number lottery processing is performed. In the subsequent step S1204, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. Then, in step S1205, the addition notification processing is executed, and in step S1206, after setting the addition command, the special zone processing is terminated. The processing of steps S1203 to S1206 is the same as the processing of steps S918 to S921. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1203 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S918 (FIG. 40). In addition, in the specialized zone, regardless of the game result, it is set so that the number of AT mode games is always added (FIG. 41).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, a lottery for switching to the CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode, processing for increasing the number of continuous games in the CZ mode or AT mode, and the like are performed. When a lottery for shifting to the CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode is won, the winning of the transition lottery is notified after the precursor game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for Transitioning Game State Based on Display Mode Transition Lottery Results>
(2) In the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in the winning result handling process described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is completed. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning a bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1303, and then this mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by, for example, displaying "Bonus confirmed!!" Note that the processing related to the notification that the bonus has been won will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the CZ mode. If the CZ mode winning flag is set, the CZ mode winning flag is cleared in step S1305. Then, in step S1306, the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the CZ mode. In step S1307, the CZ mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the CZ mode is started. Such notification will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S1308, counting of the number of CZ mode continuations is started. Specifically, the initial value (20 in this embodiment) of the number of continuous games in the CZ mode is set in the CZ mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1308, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1304 that the CZ mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by the AT mode win. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1310. Then, in step S1311, the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the AT mode shift lottery. After that, in step S1312, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1312, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of notification of winning in the SAT mode is different from the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode. Therefore, in step S1312, the configuration may be such that the AT mode winning notification command is set so as to include information as to whether or not the SAT mode is selected. The AT mode winning notification mode and the SAT mode winning notification mode may be different as long as they are identifiable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode for the SAT mode, which has a higher degree of advantage. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode.

It should be noted that the AT mode and the SAT mode may be configured to share the winning notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the content of winning has been promoted from the AT mode to the SAT mode from the AT mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the AT mode winning notification is made. It is possible to eliminate delays due to the difference between the game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1309 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the VB mode win flag is set, the VB mode win flag is cleared in step S1314. Then, in step S1315, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1316, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1316, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1313 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1317. In step S1317, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode change notification process is terminated. When it is set, in step S1318, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. Then, in step S1319, a process of setting a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning. After the process of step S1319 is executed, in step S1320 the special zone winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialized zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1317, the mode change notification process is terminated.

That is, of the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone that transition through the precursor mode, the CZ mode is changed based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. be started. On the other hand, for the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone, only notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery or VB mode transition lottery based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0. Even if the number of precursor games becomes 0, the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not started. This is because the CZ mode as a display mode does not involve the transition of the game state, while the AT mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the game state. This is due to the difference that VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state. As for the specialized zone, there are cases where the transition of the game state is not accompanied (from the 3rd RT state to the 3rd RT state). The processing configuration is as described above.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the player wins the winning combination for shifting the game state. It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the AT mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the AT mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S707) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning a winning hand (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 . Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. Notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Pushing down process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 47, the pushing process executed in step S707 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1401 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1402 to determine whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. As already explained, the AT notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the AT mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 45). be.

When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1403, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1404, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

It should be noted that, in step S1403, when the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, basically, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT mode winning notification is performed after the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after switching to the AT mode and before the transition to the AT mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the AT mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation, etc. Even in such a case, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1405 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1407, processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1408, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the second. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1402, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the process for informing the pushing order. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends, the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay winning, and the 3rd replay winning is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of shifting to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the AT mode is not won by chance and the game shifts to the second RT state, the game immediately shifts to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1409 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1410, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1411 whether or not the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 45). be. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursory games in the precursory mode becomes 0 after winning the special zone transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 45). be.

When the notification flag for VB or the notification flag for specialized zone is set, in step S1412, processing for notifying the pressing order of the fourth re-game or fifth re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1413, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1410, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1411, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed in step S1407, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1408. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when winning the second promotion replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode or the special zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and the AT mode is performed. If it is not in the mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1414 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay. Affirmative determination in step S1414 means that any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1415, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1416 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for special zone is set, in step S1417, the process for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth to eighth regames, the operation order corresponding to the seventh regame win is reported (see FIG. 23(c)). After that, in step S1418, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1415, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1416, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed in step S1403, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1404. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning the BAR replay without winning the VB mode or the specialized zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pushing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay winning prize is performed, and the state shifts to the second RT state. is generated, and if the AT mode is not in effect, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1414, it is determined in step S1419 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the pressing order bell. If the pressing order bell wins, it is determined in step S1420 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the CZ mode. If it is not the normal mode or the CZ mode, in step S1421, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1422, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1419 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1420, the actual pressing order process is terminated without performing the process for notifying the pressing order.

Note that in the case of a configuration in which at least a predetermined number of (once) push order notifications are executed in the CZ mode, it is determined in step S1420 whether or not a predetermined number of push order notifications have been executed during the CZ mode. should be If a negative determination is made in this determination, the predetermined number of times is counted, and the processing for notifying the pressing order in step S1421 may be performed.

Also, if the pressing order bell is won in the situation where the AT notification flag is set (if the negative determination is made in step S1420), and if the current game state is the normal game state, it corresponds to the first minor winning prize. It is preferable not to notify the pressing order. By doing so, the transition output is stopped, and the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state, that is, after that, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 wins and the transition to the high RT state is possible. It becomes possible.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1501, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continued games in the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted. In the subsequent step S1502, a post-loading notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing the post-addition notification described with reference to FIG. On the condition that the addition information corresponding to the addition counter BG (post-addition notification) is executed. Then, the value corresponding to the executed addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the addition counter BG, and the addition flag is cleared under the condition that the addition counter BG is 0.

In the subsequent step S1503, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third regame winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1504, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the third re-game winning is established without the condition for shifting to the AT mode being established. The winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. In addition to the AT mode flag, a CZ mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB/RB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the AT mode, the AT mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1505, when it is determined that the AT mode flag is set, in addition to the AT mode, the VB mode and the special zone are included. .

At step S1505, if the AT mode flag is set, the display mode is already AT mode, so the process for dealing with winning results is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, the process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1506 to S1509.

That is, in step S1506, the AT mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1507, the AT mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1508, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the AT mode.

After performing the process of step S1508, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. A positive determination in step S1509 means that the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1510, (steps S1519 to S1521). The processing for starting the additional specialized zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the winning result handling process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1503 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1512, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the 4th and 5th re-game wins are established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. , the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not the VB mode flag has been set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1514 to S1516.

That is, in step S1514, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that shifts through the AT mode, and the shift to the AT mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1515, a VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1516, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1516, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1511 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1517. In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In this embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the middle stage of the left reel 32L has a "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R has a "black BAR" symbol. When the "black BAR" pattern stops and the "black BAR" pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the special addition zone. The case where the 7th re-game win is established means the case where BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game win. There is (Fig. 23(c)).

If the seventh replay winning has been established, it is determined in step S1518 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1519 to S1521. As already described, when the SAT mode is started, even if affirmative determination is made in step S1509 and the process of step S1510 is performed, the process of steps S1519 to S1521 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1519, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S 1520 , the specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1521, counting of the number of continuations of the specialized zone is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1521, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1517 or step S1518, the winning result handling process is terminated.

As described above, in particular, based on the winning of the combination (third to fifth replays) corresponding to shifting the gaming state to the second RT state or the third RT state, RT state processing (FIG. 21) , performs processing for shifting the display mode. This is to avoid the AT mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when the display mode is shifted, among those accompanied by the shift of the game state, the shift to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or the CZ mode to the AT mode, or when shifting from the AT mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the AT mode or VB mode to the special zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to a lower mode, the display mode is not shifted when the game state shifts due to, for example, a second replay win as a fall replay or a stop of the transition roll. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games played. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1501 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes is 0. Then, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the number-of-games management process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. In other words, in the 1-bet and 2-bet games, the number of games in the omen mode and the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode are not counted. Note that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the current display mode is the CZ mode. If it is the CZ mode, the process advances to step S1603 to execute the CZ mode process, and then the game count management process ends. In the CZ mode processing, processing is performed in accordance with the progress of the game during the CZ mode. The CZ mode processing will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S1602 that the mode is not the CZ mode, the process advances to step S1604. In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process of clearing the display mode flags of the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag is performed in step S1605, and then the number-of-games management process ends. In other words, when the bonus win flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the AT mode or the like is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1605, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1605, while the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the AT notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an AT mode, it is possible to return to the game state before the bonus by notifying the pressing order for shifting the game state by these flags. On the other hand, when a bonus is won in a special zone, the special zone is terminated by the bonus win. Also, in step S1605, the AT mode winning flag and the like are not cleared. Therefore, when the AT mode or the like and the bonus are won at the same time, the winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus is finished.

If the determination in step S1604 is negative, it is determined in step S1606 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1607. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1606 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1607 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1608 to S1625. .

That is, in step S1608, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. If it is in AT mode, the process advances to step S1609 to determine whether it is a specialized zone in AT mode. That is, in the case of shifting to the specialized zone at the start of the AT mode like the SAT mode, affirmative determination is made in step S1609. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1622 to S1625. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1609 that the zone is not a specialized zone, in step S1610, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of AT mode continuation games. Then, in step S1611, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1612, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1613. After that, in step S1614, an AT mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the AT mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1614, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1608 that the mode is not the AT mode, the process advances to step S1615. In step S1615, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1616 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If the zone is not a special zone for addition, the VB mode continuation game count is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1617. Then, in step S1618, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1619, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1620. After that, in step S1621, a VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1621, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1616 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1622. As already explained, even if it is determined in step S1609 that the zone is the specialized zone in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1622. In step S1622, the special zone continuation game number is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1623, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1624, and the special zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1625. Upon receiving the special zone end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will end in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1625, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1615 or step S1623, the game number management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S618 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is met, and when the bonus is to be terminated, processing for notification of winning such as the AT mode in which the bonus and duplicate winning are performed, and AT mode in which the bonus and duplicate winning are performed. For example, processing for adding the number of games is performed.

That is, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. As already explained, during the bonuses of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the 1st BB hand is established with a high probability, and the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand are partially established (FIG. 27). When the 1st role in the BB is won, the 1st minor role is mainly won, and a predetermined number of medals (9 medals) are paid out, and the 2nd role in the BB and the 3rd role in the BB are replayed in the 9th replay. This is a replay of the tenth replay, and medals are not paid out even if a prize is established. Also, during the CB, a CB medium and small combination is won, and regardless of which one is won, the first minor combination is mainly won and a predetermined number (15) of medals are paid out. Step S1701 is a process for determining whether or not a small winning combination that causes a medal payout has been established among the winning combinations during the bonus or CB.

If it is determined in step S1701 that a minor win has been established, then in step S1702 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 is executed, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0 in step S1703. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after the bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1704, in steps S1705 to S1719, processing for notification of winning such as AT mode, AT mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

That is, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the number of precursor games is selected in step S1706, the number of precursor games is set in step S1707, and the precursor command is set in step S1708. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S1706, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1707, the number of premonitory games of 0 game is always set, and winning notification of AT mode or the like is performed in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process of step S1708, the end determination process is terminated.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode winning flag is set in step S1709. If the CZ mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1706 to S1708 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the CZ mode winning flag is not set in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in step S1710. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the precursor mode processing of steps S1706 to S1708 is executed. That is, when the bonus ends in a situation in which the CZ mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the CZ mode and the VB mode win notification is performed through the premonitory game.

It should be noted that the case where the AT mode winning flag, the CZ mode winning flag, or the VB mode winning flag is set to the affirmative determination in step S1705, step S1709, or step S1710 means that the bonus ends when the AT mode or CZ mode is set. This is the case where the mode or the like and the bonus are won at the same time.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1710, the process proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, it is determined whether or not the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is set, AT mode addition game count lottery processing is performed in step S1712, AT mode game addition processing is performed in step S1713, and addition notification processing is performed in step S1714. , and an addition command is set in step S1715. The processes of steps S1712 to S1715 are the same as the processes of steps S918 to S921.

After executing the processing in either step S1708 or step S1715, or after making a negative determination in step S1711, the process advances to step S1716. In step S1716, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, thereby determining whether or not the CZ mode is still in effect when the bonus state ends. Incidentally, in the number-of-games management process of FIG. 49, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared when the bonus is won, but the CZ mode flag is not cleared (step S1605). In other words, if the bonus winning is in the CZ mode, the CZ mode can be continued, and there are cases where the CZ mode continues even when the bonus ends.

If the CZ mode flag has been set in step S1716, then in step S1717, a process of setting the termination CZ flag in the various flags storage area 106d is executed. The end CZ flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the CZ mode continued until the end of the bonus. If a negative determination is made in step S1716, or if the process of step S1717 has been executed, this end determination process ends.

As described above, on the main controller 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) winning result. As a result of the processing for shifting the display mode based on , the pressing order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65, the game state is shifted so as to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, A pressing order bell winning can be generated by the pressing order notification performance by the auxiliary display section 65, and a large amount of medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, when the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell win is performed, if the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed, in addition to the pressing order notification effect, the main control The instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101 also informs of the pressing order. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 51(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is a bonus that can be won in the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the SAT mode, or the CZ mode in a situation where the display mode is the normal mode, or that the AT mode, the SAT mode, or the CZ mode can be won at the same time. Lights up when (1st BB) is won. In addition, when the AT mode, the SAT mode, the CZ mode, or the first BB is completed and the mode is shifted to the normal mode (excluding the case where the AT mode or the like is shifted again after passing through the precursor mode or the like), the light is turned off.

In other words, the navigation state (AT mode, SAT mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player in an advantageous manner to facilitate winning, and the navigation state can be activated. A chance state (CZ mode, first BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or a winning state that has won the lottery but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. The section including (winning mode) is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the advantageous section and turned off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether or not there is a section.

The eighth display segment N8 is a game that starts a game in which a game result (such as a special hand such as a strong cherry) that triggered the advantageous section such as the navigation state, the chance state, and the winning state is won and the game result is established. Then, at a timing before the game operation by the player is permitted in the game subsequent to the start game, lighting is started as a notification that the advantageous section will be reached. More specifically, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the winning of the game result that triggered the advantageous section is established, that is, regardless of whether or not there is a dropout, the game in which the game result is won is played. As the start game, the eighth display segment N8 is lit at a timing before the betting operation is permitted as a game operation by the player in the next game. In other words, the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts before the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Hereinafter, as processes related to lighting/lighting out of the eighth display segment N8, the first section display process and the second section display process will be described.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it means that the AT mode, the SAT mode, or the CZ mode transition lottery is won as an advantageous section, or during these modes. indicates the case. If a negative determination is made in step S1801 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether or not either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is turned off and either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set, in the current lottery process, the lottery for transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode , or a case where a lottery for switching to the SAT mode is won. As already explained, in the first special winning process (FIG. 32), if the lottery for transition to CZ mode is won, the CZ mode winning flag is set, and if the lottery for transition to AT mode or SAT mode is won. , an AT mode win flag is set. In step S1802, if none of the flags is set, the section display first processing is terminated.

If either the CZ mode winning flag or the AT mode winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1803 to start displaying the section indicator by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound of "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S1803, in step S1804, the process of starting to count the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is executed, and then the first section display process ends. The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is determined by measuring the number of games in the advantageous interval AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S1804, the number of games in the advantageous interval is set to 0, which is the initial value. I do. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is incremented by 1 for each game in the advantageous interval.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1805 processing is performed to continue the display during the advantageous section, and then this first section display processing is performed. exit. Specifically, in step S1805, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being lit. If the light is off (non-lighting, non-display), the second section display process is terminated. If it is during lighting display, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games in the advantageous interval, and counts the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit. After executing the process of step S1902, the number-of-remaining-games management process is executed in step S1903. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, first, in step S2001, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. The number of precursor games G1 indicates the number of remaining precursor mode games, for example, when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2002, the CZ mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The CZ mode continuation count G2 represents the number of remaining CZ mode games, for example, when the current state is the CZ mode in the advantageous zone, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . Note that, in the present embodiment, the number of continuous CZ modes may change after the fact, and the number of continuous CZ modes G2 represents the final number of remaining games. In step S2003, the AT mode continuation number G3 is grasped. The AT mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, for example, when the current state is the AT mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2004, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2005, the specialized zone continuation number G5 is grasped. The specialized zone continuation number G5 represents the number of games remaining in the specialized zone, for example, when the current status is the specialized zone in the advantageous section, and is set by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). subtracted. In step S2006, the number of BB/RB remaining games G6 is grasped. The number of remaining BB/RB games G6 indicates the number of remaining BB/RB mode games when, for example, the current situation is the BB/RB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and the number of games management process (FIG. 49) is performed. Each time it is activated, 1 is decremented by a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the BB/RB mode is in progress.

Here, values of 0 or more may be input to these continuation numbers G1 to G6 even if the mode or zone does not correspond to the current state. Specifically, for example, in the VB mode, the specialized zone, or the BB/RB mode, the counting of the number of remaining games in the AT mode is stopped. When the transition to the RB mode occurs, a value of 0 or more is input to the AT mode continuation count G3 and the continuation count of each of these modes.

In step S2007, a process of calculating the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G6 grasped in each process of steps S2001 to S2006. By performing such processing, it is possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section continues. In the subsequent step S2008, a process of calculating the total number of games in the advantageous interval SG is performed by adding the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval AG) and the remaining number of games ZG. Then, in step S2009, the number of vacant games (the number of vacant games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the above-mentioned total number of games SG in the advantageous interval from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous interval. process.

After the processing of step S2009 is performed, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the number of empty games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is an empty game number and can be added. If the free game number FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of empty games FG is 0 or less, the process of setting an excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S2011, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The excess flag indicates a situation in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section cannot be increased, more specifically, the CPU 102 grasps a situation in which even if an increase is made, the additional games are not played due to forced termination at the 1500th game. is a flag for

By setting the excess flag, in the present embodiment, even if a specific role is won during the advantageous section, the execution of the lottery for adding the number of games during the AT mode is restricted. More specifically, for example, in step S914, step S1101, or the like, in the AT mode game number addition lottery process, if the excess flag is set, the execution of the lottery process is restricted, and the extra lottery will not be won. (Or, even if you win, 0 games will be added). As a result, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the advantageous section will continue for the upper limit number of games or more by adding the game to the amount that cannot be continued.

It should be noted that once the excess flag is set, the remaining game number management process may not be executed in the current advantageous section.

Returning to the description of the second section display process (FIG. 53), after executing the process of step S1903, in step S1904, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit value of "1500" in the current game. determine whether or not If it reaches "1500", the number of games in the advantageous section AG is cleared to 0 in step S1905, and then the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished in step S1906 as processing for ending the display of the section indicator. process to cause Then, after performing data initialization processing in step S1907, the second section display processing ends.

The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the current advantageous interval and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous interval to their initial values. For example, if a CZ mode winning flag, an AT mode winning flag, or the like is set at the time of transition to an advantageous section, or a VB mode winning flag is set during AT mode, and the flag remains set until this initialization process. clears these winning flags. Also, in the initialization processing, if the AT notification flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, special zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the omen counter, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, etc. is greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S1904 that the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not reached the upper limit value, the process advances to step S1908 to determine whether or not the advantageous interval has ended. That is, in step S1908, it is determined whether or not neither the CZ mode winning flag nor the AT mode winning flag is set, and in step S1909, neither the CZ mode flag nor the AT mode flag is set. state or not. Affirmative determination in both steps S1908 and S1909 means that the advantageous interval has ended before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval. Along with clearing to 0, end processing of the display of the section indicator is performed in step S1906, data initialization processing is performed in step S1907, and then the second section display processing is terminated. If a negative determination is made in either step S1908 or step S1909, it is determined that the current section is still in an advantageous section, and the second section display processing is terminated. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 55, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not illuminated) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, the pressing order notification effect is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to an advantageous section that has an instruction function such as the pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, when winning a lottery to transition to an advantageous section such as CZ mode or AT mode by winning a weak watermelon role, etc., the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established is set as the starting game. At the timing before the betting operation by the player is permitted in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator lights up, and the notification of the advantageous section is started.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon combination is won as described above, the game is in the state before transition to the advantageous section, and is included in the normal section. Then, regarding the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator indicating the advantageous interval, the notification of the advantageous interval is the timing at which the betting operation for the game following the starting game in which the weak watermelon role was won is permitted. In other words, if the game in which the advantageous section starts is considered to be played at the timing when the game becomes playable, as described above, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon role winning game (starting game). The notification can be said to be prior notification performed prior to the notification of the advantageous section (in-state notification, in-mode notification).

After that, in the situation where the advantageous section is being notified, the pressing order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit and the final game of the advantageous interval is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also extinguished, and the notification of the advantageous interval ends. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in games in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Up to the game is the number of games in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

In this manner, the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the advantageous section is reached, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the advantageous section ends. Then, the eighth display segment N8 not only starts lighting based on the transition to the CZ mode, the AT mode, etc., but also based on winning the lottery for transition to the CZ mode, the AT mode, etc. Lighting starts. In other words, even if no notification is given in the game in which the lottery for transition to these modes has been won, whether or not the lottery for transition to these modes has been won can be determined by checking whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is an advantage between players who end the game without knowing it even though they have won the lottery to switch to these modes and the succeeding players who take their seats after that. It can be made so that there is no difference in degree.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the setting value regarding the game property of changing the degree of advantage by informing the pressing order of the CZ mode, the AT mode, or the like. Therefore, by making the playability based on the push order notification a uniform advantage for each game table (set value) and each game (situation), the advantage/disadvantage between players is eliminated, and the privilege is aimed at the pattern. While fully enjoying the original game property of the slot machine 10 of obtaining .

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S2102. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101 or after the processing of step S2102 is executed, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of betting. A bet time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the bet operation being performed, and in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, mode transition notification processing (see FIG. 45), an AT mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these bet time commands, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S2104.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or if the process of step S2104 has been executed, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 32 to 35), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 47), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2106.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, or if the process of step S2106 has been executed, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command for each stop operation, the effect setting process for each stop operation is executed in step S2108.

If a negative determination is made in step S2107, or if the process of step S2108 has been executed, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, there are an AT mode start command, a VB mode start command, a special zone start command, etc., which are set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 48). In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2110.

When a negative determination is made in step S2109, or after the process of step S2110 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2111, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2111, setting effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main controller 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. It should be noted that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects in FIGS.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The betting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode start command is included in the betting time command received this time. When the CZ mode start command is included, in step S2202, processing for setting the CZ mode start effect is performed. In the CZ mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the text "Chance zone start" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display mode to be changed is likely to win the AT mode change lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) that suggests the situation is performed. In addition, in the CZ mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a loud male voice saying "It's a chance!") is emitted.

If the CZ mode start command is not included in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the AT mode win notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the AT mode winning notification command is included, in step S2204, the process of setting the AT mode winning notification effect is performed. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT confirmed". In addition, in the AT mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "I did it!") is emitted.

If the AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2203, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S2206, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "V-BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "super lucky!") is emitted.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2205, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2208, a process of setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "I did it!") is emitted.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, in a predetermined case, a special effect may occur in the bonus winning notification effect. Such a configuration will be described later in detail.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2207, it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the special zone winning notification command is included as the betting time command received this time. When the special zone winning notification command is included, in step S2210, a process of setting a special zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "Ride on!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a thick, ecstatic male voice, "Norinori!") is emitted.

After any one of steps S2202, S2204, S2206, S2208 and S2210 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S2209, in step S2211, various flag storage area 183a winning postponement flag is set. In the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, there may be a situation in which a predetermined bonus prize winning should be postponed. flag. If the winning postponement flag is set, a special notification process is executed in step S2212. The special notification process will be described later together with the detailed description of the winning postponement flag.

When a negative determination is made in step S2211, or after the processing of step S2212 is executed, in step S2213, other effects at the time of betting are set, and then this effect setting process is terminated. In the process of step S2213, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, and in the corresponding display mode , the display effect of the auxiliary display section 65 is set. Specifically, a CZ mode flag, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are also set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side as flags for grasping the display mode. Areas are provided in which a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end of each mode. For example, the CZ mode flag is set in the setting processing of the CZ mode start effect in step S2202. In step S2301, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the subsequent step S2302, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S2303, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2403, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third replay win is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2405 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to perform push order notification that the first replay win is established, and then finish the push order notification process. do.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the replays are not falling replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2206 and the special zone winning notification effect in step S2210, the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 indicate that VB winning or special zone winning has been announced. set a flag. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2407, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If the VB mode or special zone winning announcement has been completed, in step S2408, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to announce the pressing order in which the 4th and 5th regame winnings are established. , terminates the pressing order notification process. If the notification of winning in the VB mode or the special zone has not been completed, the process advances to step S2405 to perform notification of the pressing order for the first regame winning, and then terminates the processing for notification of the pressing order.

If it is determined in step S2406 that the replay is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2409 whether or not the current lottery result is the BAR replay. In the case of BAR replay, it is determined in step S2410 whether or not the special zone winning notification effect has been executed. If it has already been announced that the special zone has been won, in step S2411, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform push order notification that the seventh regame win is established, and then the push order notification process is executed. finish. If the special zone winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2403 to perform the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2409 that it is not a BAR replay, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2413, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to perform the push order notification that the bell win is established as the first minor combination, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. . If a negative determination is made in step S2412, the pressing order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 58), if it is determined in step S2302 that the push-up role is not won, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S2305. The transition trigger notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S2304, or after the processing of step S2303 or step S2305 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S2307, processing for setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S2307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the following step S2502, processing for grasping notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by the process (additional notification process) on the side of the main controller 101 described above. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned add-on command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2502, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2502 is that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. The case where the addition notification is not performed in the current game is the case where the subsequent addition notification is selected, and in this case, the setting processing of the addition effect is finished as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2505, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2505, the processing of reading out the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the performance data storage area 182b and temporarily storing the data in the predetermined performance data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, it is determined in step S2506 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. When these reels are to be stopped and turned OFF, in step S2507, the target reel for which the additional effect is to be generated is set so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is stopped and turned OFF. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Also in step S2507, processing is performed to read effect data of an additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games from the effect data storage area 182b and temporarily store the data in a predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2506, in step S2508, setting is made so that the current additional effect is generated when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2508, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2505, step S2507 or step S2508, the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, when the addition command is not received in step S2306, or after the process of step S2307 is executed, the effect setting process during the bonus is executed in step S2308, and the process proceeds to step S2309. Then, in step S2310, after setting other start effects, the start effect setting process is terminated. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S2310, for example, an effect indicating the lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is extinguished to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S2108 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the process advances to step S2602 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2603 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the reel stop operation that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2604, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the stop ON operation effect is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the auxiliary display section 65 An additional production will occur. Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the first reel shown in FIG. 46(a) is displayed as the operation target. . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the second reel is displayed as a stop target shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 46(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process advances to step S2605 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is finished.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, the process advances to step S2606 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation effect. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If the determination in step S2605 is negative, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the currently received stop command includes a CZ mode end command. When the CZ mode end command is included, in step S2702, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ mode end effect is performed. In the CZ mode end presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Chance Zone End". In addition, in the CZ mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the CZ mode (for example, a loud male voice saying "More diligence!").

If the CZ mode end command is not included in step S2701, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the AT mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the AT mode start command is included, in step S2704, a process of setting the AT mode start effect is performed. In the AT mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT start!! LV.1". In addition, in the AT mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "Let's go!") is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "LV.1" in the AT mode start effect corresponds to the AT mode level. That is, the AT mode started this time is ATLV. This is a display indicating the 1 mode. The AT mode level is ATLV. When the mode is promoted to the 2nd mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "LV.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as promotion effects. Also, the AT mode level is ATLV. 3 mode, the letters "LV.3" are displayed, and ATLV. When promoted to 4 mode, the characters "LV.4" are displayed.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2703, it is determined in step S2705 whether or not the AT mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. When the AT mode end command is included, in step S2706, processing for setting AT mode end effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), in the AT mode ending effect, characters "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the current AT mode (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed. , and the total number of payouts for the current AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the AT mode termination presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "see you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2705, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. When the VB mode start command is included, in step S2708, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 Lucky!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "bonus start!") is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2707, it is determined in step S2709 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. If the VB mode end command is included, a process for setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2710. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the characters "V-BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the AT mode continuation game at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) and the total payout number of AT mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2709, it is determined in step S2711 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2712, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2711, it is determined in step S2713 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2714, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2713, it is determined in step S2715 whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2716, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, AT mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus ending effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is produced depending on whether the AT mode is appropriate, whether the CZ mode is appropriate or not, and the number of additional games.

After any one of steps S2702, S2704, S2706, S2708, S2710, S2712, S2714, and S2716 is executed, or after a negative determination is made in step S2715, the process proceeds to step S2717. In step S2717, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2307 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 60), when the generation timing of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in step S2718, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the main effect setting process is terminated. In step S2718, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, control is performed so that sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, and control is performed during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, effects during bonuses and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that is shifted based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, AT mode, CZ mode, VB mode, etc.), and the game is played multiple times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final game.

<Bonus effect setting process>
First, the effect setting processing during bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The during-bonus effect setting process is a process executed in step S2308 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 58).

In the bonus effect setting process, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB, 2nd BB or RB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S2801 means that the 1st BB, 2nd BB or RB winning has been established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2802, a process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, or the RB winning. Then, in step S2803, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type ascertained in step S2802 is set. When a negative determination is made in step S2801, or after the processing of step S2803 is executed, the during-bonus effect setting processing is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the contents of the bonus effect are different between the bonus game based on the first BB winning and the bonus game based on the second BB winning to such an extent that the player can identify them. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning, the auxiliary display section 65 is set with a bonus effect in which live-action moving image effects are performed, and in the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning, the animation A bonus effect is set in which the effect is performed by. Also, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different between the first BB and the second BB. Furthermore, in the case of the bonus game based on the RB winning, the contents of the bonus effect are different from those of the bonus game based on the first BB winning and the bonus game based on the second BB winning to such an extent that the player can identify them. .

Both bonus effects are effects that are performed independently regardless of the progress of the game, and are set to be performed repeatedly as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute animation performance or animation performance is set as a unit performance, and when the unit performance ends after five minutes have passed since the start of the bonus performance, the unit performance is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 may be stopped at the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effect (song) may be repeated. Moreover, the effects on the auxiliary display section 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently regardless of the progress of each game.

As described above, while the bonus effect based on the 1st BB win and the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB win can be identified, the game result that triggered the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win can be identified from the bonus effect. It is set to be impossible or difficult to identify. That is, regarding the bonus effect based on the 1BB winning, for example, the bonus effect is distinguished between the case of winning the 1BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply A and the case of winning the first BB with the opportunity of winning one special reply AB. Impossible or difficult to identify, more specifically, the same bonus effect is executed. In addition, the same applies to the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB winning. It is difficult, and the same bonus effect is executed.

<Processing for continuous production>
An outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). It shows the daruma dropping performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the first daruma drop is successful, It indicates that the continuous production will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect will end in the middle (for example, an effect that the daruma drop in the first step fails). ). The effect regarding whether or not to continue the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the second daruma drop is successful, indicating that the continuous effect is continued). ).

As shown in FIG. 72(c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued. ).

As shown in FIG. 72(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, a one-stage daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is given as to whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows the effect that the daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Here, in each game of the continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues to the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous effect progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous effect will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be reported. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the player's level of interest greatly differs depending on what game the current game is in the continuous effect, and as the game progresses from the start game to the end game, the player's interest becomes high. .

Hereinafter, as the processing relating to the above-described continuous effect, the process for notifying the transition timing role (step S2305) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2309) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 58) will be described.

<Transition trigger notification process>
64, first, in step S2901, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set a chance effect as the present game effect is executed. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 71(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Chance!!" to correspond to and display each. In addition, in the chance presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "kyui") is emitted. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance effect occurs about half the time when the transition opportunity role is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may differ depending on the type of transition opportunity combination, display mode, game state, set value, and the like. In the subsequent step S2902, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2901 has been won. If the player wins, in step S2903, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing the winning of each minor combination including the shift trigger combination will be described.

Among the winable hands in each game, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon are set as the so-called small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. . More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 28th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L, The 32nd to 35th minor symbol symbols are the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbols, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry combination may be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 27th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 27th minor combination symbol, the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 32nd minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th minor symbol, 32nd minor symbol to 35th minor symbol "Cherry" symbol and "2nd replay" symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination may be missed.

The strong watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 30th or 41st minor combination, and the 30th or 41st minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth “red 7” symbol to the third “white bell” symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 29th or 41st minor combination, and the 29th or 41st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "Watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that can be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are displayed on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when reaching the upper stage. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a failure. It is also called a mode (second operation mode).

In the chance presentation set in step S2903, it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the transition trigger roles, but it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. It is That is, when the chance effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even if any of the transition timing combinations is won.

Further, the chance effect is not necessarily generated in the game in which the transition opportunity role is won, but is generated on the condition that the game is won in the chance effect lottery process (step S2901). Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode every game from the normal time so as not to miss the transition opportunity.

If a negative determination is made in step S2902, or if the process of step S2903 has been performed, the process advances to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the current starting command. If the portent command is not included, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the add-on command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the add-on command is not included, it is determined in step S2906 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, that is, if the lottery result is a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, a lottery for transition to the CZ mode, AT mode, or VB mode or addition of the number of continuous games If neither the lottery nor the bonus has been won, in step S2907, lottery processing in the pseudo-prediction mode is executed. The pseudo precursor mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo precursor games.

In step S2907, a table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is acquired from the table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from the counter area 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo-prediction mode is to be executed. conduct. In the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of transition opportunity that has been won. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S2908, based on the processing result of step S2907, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S2909, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S810 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the number of pseudo precursor games, which is 1 out of 1 to 20, by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the portent modes based on various winnings, the number of pseudo portent games is determined to be 20 games or less. Also, in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 games are not selected. In subsequent step S2910, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2909 is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. Then, in step S2910, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous production counter, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining four games), the continuous production is started. It will happen.

In step S2911, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In the following step S2912, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the transition trigger notification process is terminated. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in any one of steps S2904 to S2906, or when the negative determination is made in step S2908, the transition triggering role notification processing is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2309 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. When the precursor command is included, in step S3002, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In step S3002, when the number of precursor games of the 1st to 3rd games is input to the continuous effect counter, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S3002, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 72(c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the winning notification of the AT mode or the like is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S3002, a continuous effect flag is set in step S3003.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or if the process of step S3003 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, it is determined whether or not a continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S3005. Then, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S3007. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S3008 to acquire the present prognostic effect table from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3009, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the indication and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present effect table for indication is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S3007 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3010. In step S3010, a pseudo-prediction effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3011, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

Incidentally, the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data for the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data for the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 72(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo-prediction games in the pseudo-prediction mode is 0.

After performing the process of step S3009 or step S3011, it is determined whether the continuous production|presentation counter is 0 in step S3012. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S3013. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S3004, step S3006 or step S2912, or after performing the process of step S3013, this continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the side of the main controller 101 based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are activated. When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. In the configuration where benefits are granted, multiple infinite RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the infinite RT state shifts when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay wins. . Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process, and the transition of the display mode. It is done by winning the lottery. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to win a prize for the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as an infinite RT state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to a display mode in which the operation order is notified, the replay probability is improved in the infinite RT state. The winning order of the bell can be established by pressing the bell, and a large amount of medals can be obtained.

As already explained, when the player shifts to, for example, the AT mode as a mode in which a large amount of medals can be obtained, the initial number of games (50) is set, and the AT mode can be played over the initial number of games. If an additional lottery is won in the AT mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the AT mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the AT mode can also be increased.

These lotteries for transition to AT mode and the like and additional lotteries are executed based on the game results of each game. is done. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, especially in the CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed regardless of the game results of each game. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the lottery for switching to the AT mode in this embodiment will be described.

<CZ mode processing>
As already explained, the lottery for switching to AT mode is performed in CZ mode. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the CZ mode processing in this embodiment. The CZ mode process is a process executed at step S1603 of the number-of-games management process (FIG. 49) in the winning result handling process executed at the end of the game. In the CZ mode of the present embodiment, not only the lottery result of each game in the CZ mode, but also the AT mode shift lottery is performed according to the number of continuations, and the continuation of the CZ mode is determined by lottery. The CZ mode process is a process for performing an AT mode lottery and a CZ mode continuation lottery according to the number of continuations of the CZ mode.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not a fallen flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The fallen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the CZ mode has ended. The fallen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the CZ mode continuation lottery is not won and the CZ mode is terminated, that is, the drop lottery to the normal mode is won.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the fallen flag has been set, processing for clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S3102. Then, in step S3103, processing for setting the CZ mode end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the CZ mode processing ends. That is, in this case, the CZ mode end effect (FIG. 67(b)) is generated in the game, and the player is notified that the CZ mode has ended.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the fallen flag has not been set, the process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, addition processing of the number of CZ mode continuations is executed. More specifically, a process of adding 1 to the CZ mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

Here, as described above, in each game, lotteries related to instruction functions such as a lottery for transition to CZ mode and a lottery for increasing the number of continuations of AT mode are restricted during the bonus state or bonus carryover state. be. In the following description, a state in which the execution of the instruction function lottery is restricted, such as during the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state, is also referred to as a restricted state. On the other hand, the process of adding the number of CZ mode continuations (step S3104) in this CZ mode process is performed regardless of whether or not it is in the restricted state. In other words, the process of adding the number of CZ mode continuations can be said to be a process that is continued (performed) even in a situation where the execution of the lottery for the instruction function is restricted.

Then, in step S3105, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation counter has reached 19. That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is the 19th game in the CZ mode. If it is the 19th game and the next game is the 20th game, then in step S3106 the process of setting the falling lottery flag in the various flags storage area 106d is executed, and then the CZ mode process ends. The drop lottery flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the CZ mode continuation lottery, that is, the drop lottery should be carried out. In the present embodiment, a drop lottery is performed after the 20th game in the CZ mode, and when the drop lottery is won, the CZ mode ends and the normal mode is entered. In other words, the CZ mode in this embodiment is configured to continue for at least 20 games even if the lottery for switching to the AT mode is not won.

If it is determined in step S3105 that it is not the 19th game, the process proceeds to step S3107. In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation counter has reached 29. That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is the 29th game in the CZ mode. If it is the 29th game and the next game is the 30th game, it is determined in step S3108 whether or not the current status is a bonus state or a bonus carry-over state. If it is not in a restricted state such as a bonus state or a bonus carry-over state, the process advances to step S3109 to execute processing to clear the CZ mode flag, and execute processing to set the AT mode winning flag in step S3110. Then, in step S3111, after performing a process of setting a precursor command for setting the number of precursor games to 0 as an output target to the display control device 81, the CZ mode process is terminated. In this case, the CZ mode ends in the current game, and the AT mode win notification effect is performed in the next game (Fig. 68(a)).

On the other hand, if the current game is not the 29th game in step S3107, or if the restricted state is in effect in step S3108, the CZ mode processing is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed on the condition that the CZ mode continues for 30 games and the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is not restricted. Also, after the 20th game in the CZ mode, the drop lottery of the CZ mode is performed, so in the CZ mode, if the drop lottery is continued until the 30th game while avoiding the drop lottery after the 20th game, the shift to the AT mode is possible. It is a playability such as confirming.

<AT mode lottery processing>
The AT mode lottery process executed according to the lottery result of each game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The AT mode lottery process is a process executed when the current display mode is the CZ mode in the first special combination process (FIG. 32) (step S811).

In step S3201, it is determined whether or not the end CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the execution of the lottery related to the instruction function is restricted in the restricted state during the bonus state or the bonus carryover state, while the addition processing of the number of continuations of the CZ mode (step S3104) is performed in the restricted state. will continue to be implemented. On the other hand, in the CZ mode, a drop lottery is carried out after the 20th game, and the CZ mode can end when the drop lottery is won. The end CZ flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the CZ mode continued until the end of the bonus, and is set in step S1717 of the end determination process (FIG. 50) performed at the end of the bonus. is a flag that

If the end time CZ mode flag is not set, the flow advances to step S3202 to determine whether or not the restricted state exists. If it is in the restricted state, the AT mode lottery process is terminated as it is without performing the process of whether or not to shift to the AT mode after step S3203. That is, in the restricted state, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is also restricted.

If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the process advances to step S3203 to determine whether or not the falling lottery flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is the 20th game or later in the CZ mode. If it is the 20th game or later, the process advances to step S3204 to determine whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a transition opportunity such as strong cherry. If it is not a transition trigger, that is, if it is a non-transition trigger such as replay, pushing order bell, loss result, strong cherry overlap 2 or strong watermelon overlap 2, the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, a CZ mode falling lottery is executed. The winning probability (falling rate) of the CZ mode falling lottery is arbitrary, but in this embodiment, it is assumed that the falling lottery wins with a probability of 50%. That is, after the 20th game in the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends in 50% of the cases where the transition opportunity role is not won, and the CZ mode ends in 50% of the cases where the transition opportunity role is won or not won. is configured to continue.

In step S3206, based on the result of processing in step S3205, it is determined whether or not a fall win has occurred. In the case of falling winning, the AT mode lottery process is terminated after executing a process of setting a falling flag in step S3207. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 of the above-described CZ mode processing (FIG. 73) performed when the game ends, and processing for ending the CZ mode is performed. Also, in this case, the lottery for switching to the AT mode is not carried out in the game.

If the fall lottery flag is not set in step S3203 and the game is still up to the 19th game in CZ mode, or if the transition trigger role is won even after the 20th game in step S3204, or if the transition trigger role is won in step S3206 If the falling lottery is not won, the AT mode shift lottery is executed in step S3208, and then the AT mode lottery process is terminated. In this case, a lottery for switching to the AT mode is carried out based on the CZ mode table acquired in step S810 and the game results of the current game. As already explained, in the CZ mode table, if the lottery result of this game is a strong cherry, there is a 45% probability that you will win the lottery to switch to AT mode, and if it is a weak cherry, there is a 15% probability. The winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set differently according to the lottery result of each game, such as winning the AT mode transition lottery (FIG. 38).

If it is determined in step S3201 that the end time CZ flag is set, the process advances to step S3209. In step S3209, it is determined whether or not the number of CZ mode continuations is 29 or more. That is, as described above, in step S3104, the processing for adding the number of continuations of the CZ mode is continued even in the restricted state during the bonus state or the bonus carryover state. On the other hand, in the limited state, even if the number of continuous CZ modes reaches 30 (even if the next game is the 30th game), the transition to the AT mode is not determined. For example, as a result of adding the CZ mode continuation count in the bonus end game (step S3104), even if the CZ mode continuation count reaches 29 in the bonus end game, a negative determination is made in step S3108. Therefore, the processing for winning the AT mode is not performed. The processing of steps S3201 and S3209 can be said to be processing for performing an AT mode lottery based on the number of CZ mode continuations, including the game performed during the restricted state.

If a negative determination is made in step S3209, and the number of continuations of the CZ mode has not reached 29 even though the CZ flag is set at the end, the process proceeds to step S3202, and the normal AT mode lottery Execute the process. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3209, the CZ flag at the end is set, and the number of CZ mode continuations is 29 or more, processing for clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S3210. At step S3211, the AT mode winning flag is set. Then, in step S3212, the AT mode lottery process is terminated after executing the process of setting the predictor command to set the number of continuations of the predictor mode to 0 as an output target to the display control device 81 . In this case, the CZ mode ends in the current game, and AT mode winning notification is executed in the current game (Fig. 68(a)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, by continuing the CZ mode for 30 games, the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won. It is also configured to implement By doing so, winning a bonus win during the CZ mode makes it easier to win a lottery for transition to the AT mode.

<Relationship between bonus and CZ mode>
Here, the relationship between each bonus and the CZ mode will be described with reference to FIG.

The 1st BB and the 2nd BB shift to a bonus state that continues until the number of payouts reaches 270, and these bonus states continue for about 30 games. In the CZ mode, although a fall lottery is performed after the 20th game, winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode is determined by continuing the 30th game. In a restricted state such as a bonus state, the falling lottery is restricted, while the number of continuations of the CZ mode continues to be counted. Therefore, by shifting to the bonus state based on the 1st BB or the 2nd BB during the CZ mode, the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 games during the bonus state, and winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode. is determined.

The 1st BB wins with a probability of about 1/720 in setting 1, and wins with a probability of about 1/330 in setting 6. On the other hand, the 2nd BB wins with a probability of about 1/640 in setting 1, and wins with a probability of about 1/380 in setting 6. As described above, a large amount of medals can be expected to be paid out in the bonus state transitioned by winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB. Not only that, as mentioned above, if you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB in CZ mode, you will win the AT mode transition lottery. is given preferential treatment.

As shown in the AT mode transition lottery table for the CZ mode, etc., the lottery relating to the instruction function is configured to be performed with strong cherries, strong cherry duplication 1, etc. as game results with no set difference in winning probability. In particular, among the results of double winning of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the overlapping results with a setting difference are not subject to the AT mode transition lottery. That is, in each game during the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery probability is common regardless of the set value. Also, the number of CZ mode continuations is also incremented by 1 each game. Different processing is not performed depending on the

On the other hand, as described above, the AT mode transition lottery is won when the number of CZ mode continuations reaches 30, so the occurrence rate of the specific event of transition to AT mode varies greatly depending on the setting value. become. By doing so, it is possible to vary the rate of occurrence of the specific event according to the set values while taking into account the configuration in which the set values in each game do not cause differences in the degree of advantage.

On the other hand, the RB of the bonus will shift to a bonus state that continues until the number of payouts reaches 90, and this bonus state will continue for about 10 games. Shorter than a game. Then, when the RB is won in the CZ mode, depending on the game in which the RB prize is established, the transition to the AT mode may or may not be confirmed in the CZ mode.

As described above, the relationship between the bonus state and the CZ mode will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS.

When the CZ mode is started at the timing of t1, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is executed from the same timing of t1. Then, when the AT mode transition lottery is not won until the timing of t2, when the number of continuous CZ mode reaches 20 games at the timing of t2, the CZ mode drop lottery will be performed from the game. Become. Then, if the falling lottery is not won until the timing of t3, which is before the number of continuous CZ mode reaches 30 games, and the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won at the timing of t3, the AT mode winning notification effect is performed. A notification is made that the lottery is won, and then a transition to the AT mode occurs. Even if the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won before the timing t2 at which the fall lottery is started, the shift to the AT mode is permitted thereafter.

On the other hand, when the CZ mode started at timing t4 reaches the 20th game at timing t5, a drop lottery is performed in the same manner as described above. Then, if the fall lottery is not won until the timing t3 when the number of continuous CZ mode reaches 30 games, and if the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won until the timing t3, the CZ mode is continued at the timing t3. Based on the number, a lottery for the shift to the AT mode is won, after which the shift to the AT mode is permitted.

Next, the case where the CZ mode is shifted to the bonus state will be described.

After the CZ mode is started at the timing of t11 and the AT mode transition lottery is also started, at the timing of t12, for example, if the first BB is won, the AT mode is set at the timing of t12 to t13 during the bonus carryover state. implementation of the transition lottery is restricted. When the 1st BB winning occurs at the timing of t13, the AT mode shift lottery is restricted even during the bonus state. However, the CZ mode itself is continued, and the number of continuations of the CZ mode continues to be added even after the timing of t12 when the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. As a result, the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 20 at the timing of t14.

However, the situation that reaches 20 is still in the bonus state, and the implementation of the drop lottery is also restricted. Then, the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 at the timing of t15. However, the timing of reaching 30 is still in the bonus state, and the execution of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is restricted. Therefore, at the timing of t30, the transition to the AT mode is not won. Then, at the timing of t16 when the bonus state ends, an AT mode shift lottery based on the number of CZ mode continuations is carried out, and an AT mode shift win occurs.

On the other hand, in the CZ mode started at the timing of t17, if RB is won at the timing of t18, the timing from t18 to t19 during the bonus carryover state and from t19 to t21 during the bonus state based on the winning of the RB At the timing of , execution of the AT mode shift lottery is restricted. Further, as described above, during the bonus state after the timing t20 when the number of CZ mode continuations reaches 20, the implementation of the falling lottery is restricted. However, the bonus state based on the RB winning can end at timing t21, which is before the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30. Then, although the AT mode shift lottery is restarted, the fall lottery is also executed. For example, if the fall lottery is won at the timing of t22, the CZ mode ends and the shift to the AT mode does not occur. That is, depending on the end timing of the bonus state based on the RB (winning timing), the transition to the AT mode may not occur, and the bonus winning in the CZ mode may not be effectively utilized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the RB is won, the content of the winning notification is made different depending on the number of times the CZ mode has been continued.

<Setting process of bonus winning notification effect>
FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the bonus winning notification effect in this embodiment. This setting process is a process executed in step S2208 when a bonus winning notification command is received from the main controller 101 in the betting effect setting process (FIG. 57).

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the current state is the CZ mode. If not, it is determined in step S3301 that the CZ mode is not in progress. If it is not in the CZ mode, in step S3302, it is determined which of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and RB the type of bonus won this time is. Then, in step S3303, after controlling the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. so that the winning notification corresponding to the bonus type is performed, this setting process is terminated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 80, it is preferable that the mode of bonus winning notification differs depending on the type of bonus this time. For example, if the current bonus is the 1st BB, as shown in FIG. 80(a), "Bonus confirmed" is displayed, and the stop symbols corresponding to the 1st BB winning are "Red 7", "Red 7", and " Red 7" character is displayed. On the other hand, if the current bonus is the 2nd BB, as shown in FIG. A character with a white BAR design is displayed. Then, if the bonus of this time is RB, along with the display of ``bonus fixed'', characters of ``black BAR'', ``red 7'' and ``black BAR'' patterns are displayed as stop patterns corresponding to RB winning. By doing so, the player can grasp the winning mode as well as the bonus type, and can quickly shift to the corresponding bonus state.

If it is determined in step S3301 that it is in the CZ mode, the process advances to step S3304. In step S3304, as in step S3302, processing for grasping the bonus type is executed. Then, in step S3305, it is determined whether or not the bonus to be announced this time is RB. If it is not the RB but the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, then in step S3306 the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64 and the like are controlled so that the CZ winning notification effect for the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is performed, and then this setting process is performed. exit.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 81, the advance winning notification that the player wins the AT mode shift lottery due to the bonus winning this time is performed together with the bonus winning notification. For example, as shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), the contents of the first BB winning notification in FIG. 80(a) and the contents of the second BB winning notification in FIG. The auxiliary display section 65 is controlled so that display is performed. The display "AT confirmed" should not overlap with the information display indicating the content of the 1st BB winning notification and the content of the 2nd BB winning notification (character display of bonus confirmation and character display of symbols corresponding to the winning mode). For example, it may be displayed at the top or bottom of the screen. In addition, the speaker 64 may emit a sound effect (for example, an electronic sound such as "beep") as notification of the first winning.

That is, if the bonus won during the CZ mode is the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, although the lottery for transition to the AT mode is not won when the bonus is won or during the bonus state, the end of the bonus state is the CZ mode. has continued for 30 games or more, and it can be grasped in advance that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode will be won in the first game after the end of the bonus state.

Therefore, by performing the first winning notification as in the above configuration, it is possible to inform in advance that the transition to the AT mode is permitted following the bonus based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB. It is also possible to show different states, such as 2BB and AT mode, in which a large number of medals can be expected, as a series of states.

If it is determined in step S3305 that the bonus to be announced this time is RB, the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, a process for grasping the number of continuations of the current CZ mode is executed. Then, in step S3308, it is determined whether or not the number of continuation games in the CZ mode reaches 30 games by making the RB to be notified of winning this time win a prize by determining whether or not the number of games is 20 or more. If it is determined in step S3308 that there are 20 games or more and the number of continuous CZ modes reaches 30 games through the bonus state based on the RB winning, then in step S3309 the RB CZ middle winning notification effect is performed. Then, after controlling the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, etc., the setting process is terminated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 82(a), along with the display of "Bonus confirmed", characters of "black BAR", "red 7", and "black BAR" symbols are displayed as stop symbols corresponding to RB winning. Let In addition, as in the case of FIG. 81, the AT mode first win notification is performed. When the RB winning notification is performed in step S3303, the contents of FIG. 82(a) do not include the first winning notification.

If it is determined in step S3308 that the CZ mode has not reached 20 games, then in step S3310 the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that a non-winning CZ winning notification effect is performed. After that, in step S3311, after setting the prize postponement flag in the various flag storage area 183a, this setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the non-winning CZ mid-win notifying effect, "Wait a minute! !” and predetermined characters are displayed. In addition, in the non-winning CZ medium winning notification effect, as an operation for preventing the establishment of RB winning, for example, a display of "Aim for the LUCKY symbol on the left reel" is displayed. That is, as a prize mode of the RB prize, the left reel 32L is associated with the "black BAR" symbol, and the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the "LUCKY" symbol reaches the upper stage to the lower stage of the left reel 32L. , the "black BAR" pattern cannot be drawn in, and the RB prize is not established. Therefore, the display of "Aim for the KUCKY symbol on the left reel" can also be referred to as an operation instruction presentation for the operation of missing the RB winning prize. The winning postponement flag set in step S3311 is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the operation instruction effect for the above-mentioned dropout operation has been performed.

In addition, in the non-winning CZ medium winning notification effect, the auxiliary display portion 65 displays the winning notification display character BP including the content of the RB winning notification in FIG. In other words, even when the non-winning CZ medium winning notification effect is performed, the player can grasp the type of the winning bonus and the winning mode thereof. By doing so, a player who does not want to switch to the AT mode but wants to win an RB prize can quickly establish an RB prize, as in a case where the game time is limited, for example, just before closing time. becomes possible.

Since the winning postponement flag is set in step S3311, an affirmative determination is made in step S2211 in the effect setting process at the time of betting, and the special notification process in step S2212 is performed. Here, the special notification processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3401, a process of grasping the CZ mode continuation count is executed. In addition, when the special notification processing is performed following the bonus winning notification effect setting processing (FIG. 78), the processing result of step S3307 is temporarily stored in a register or the like, and the temporarily stored information is transferred to step S3401. It is good also as a structure which reads out.

In step S3402, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous CZ modes has reached 20 games. If not, in step S3403, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the winning notification effect for the RB postponement is performed, and then the special notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3402 that the number of continuous CZ modes has reached 20 games, then in step S3404 the winning postponement flag is cleared, and in step S3405 the post-RB postponement winning notification effect is performed. After controlling the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc., the special notification process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), in the RB postponement winning notification effect, the operation instruction effect for the above-mentioned missing operation and the winning notification display character BP are displayed, and the RB prize is still established. As a display indicating that the situation has not yet reached an appropriate state, it is preferable to display the characters "life extension".

As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the RB post-postpone winning notification effect, characters of "black BAR", "red 7", and "black BAR" symbols are displayed as stop symbols corresponding to RB winning. , "Aim!!" is displayed as a prize-winning operation instruction effect for instructing an operation for establishing a RB prize. As a result, the player can understand that the AT mode transition win is confirmed by establishing the RB prize. It should be noted that, as the post-RB postponement winning notification effect, the first winning notification in the AT mode may be performed.

<The situation when RB was elected>
An overview of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode when the RB is won during the CZ mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In the case where the CZ mode is started at the timing of t21, it is assumed that the RB is won at the timing of t22 before reaching 20 games. In this case, if the RB win is established at the timing of t22, the number of continuous CZ modes may not reach 30 games after the bonus state based on the RB win. Therefore, at the timing of t22, along with the non-winning CZ mid-win notification effect, an operation instruction effect for the dropout operation is generated to notify that the RB prize should not be established.

After that, in the carry-over state until the number of continuous CZ mode reaches 20 games at the timing of t23, the RB postponement winning notification effect is performed, and it is notified that the RB winning should not be established yet. . In this situation, not only the AT mode transition lottery but also the fall lottery is restricted as described above, and the CZ mode will not end in this situation.

When the number of continuous CZ modes reaches 20 games at the timing of t23, the post-RB postponement winning notification effect is performed, and it is notified that the RB winning should be established. Then, when the RB prize is established, it shifts to a bonus state of about 10 games, and at the timing of t24 when the bonus state ends, the number of continuous CZ mode reaches 30 games, so the AT mode transition lottery is won. It will be done.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

On the premise that a drop lottery is performed in the CZ mode, when the number of continuous CZ modes reaches the ceiling of 30 games, the transition to the AT mode occurs. , During the bonus state or during the bonus carry-over state, while the drop lottery in the CZ mode is restricted, the number of continuations of the CZ mode is counted. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new game feature that utilizes the fact that the execution of the lottery relating to the instruction function is restricted during the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state.

In the present embodiment, since the execution of the drop lottery during the CZ mode is restricted even during the bonus state, the number of continuations of the bonus state can be made to contribute to the count up to the ceiling in the CZ mode. In other words, in the bonus state (first BB state, second BB state) in which a long number of games are executed, it is easier to win the AT mode based on the number of consecutive CZ modes than in the bonus state (RB state) in which a short number of games is executed. Become. By doing this, the advantage of the bonus will be based on a different scale than before, such as the number of continuations, instead of the lottery result of each game during the bonus state (the number of medals paid out, the performance of the lottery related to the instruction function based on the result, etc.). It can be determined, and it is possible to greatly help in realizing new game characteristics.

Winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB will result in execution of a minimum of 30 bonus games, so if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won during the CZ mode, the AT mode lottery will be won based on the number of continuations during the CZ mode. is determined. By doing so, it is possible to grant or not grant the AT mode winning according to the winning situation without changing the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery based on the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If RB is won, a bonus state of a minimum of 10 games will be executed. Therefore, if RB is won during CZ mode, it becomes easier to win the AT mode lottery based on the number of continuations during CZ mode, but AT mode Election is not guaranteed. By doing so, the timing of winning the RB and the timing of transition to the RB state become important factors regarding the winning of the AT mode, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

When the RB is won, the number of continuations of the CZ mode is grasped, and when the ceiling of the CZ mode is not reached in the RB state based on the RB winning, the non-winning CZ middle winning notification performance is performed. . By doing so, it is less likely that the AT mode winning will not be confirmed because the RB winning has been won in the CZ mode, but the prize is won immediately.

Here, for example, if the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery during the CZ mode is based on the RB, even if the AT mode is won with a probability of 100%, the AT mode winning is based on the RB winning during the CZ mode. You can avoid unforeseen events. However, in this case, it is necessary to make the winning probability of RB equal to the setting value, and furthermore, it is up to the player whether or not to shift to the AT mode. Once adjusted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating based on the player's starting operation, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop rotating based on the stopping operation of the stop switches 42-44. There is a risk that it will go against the real pleasure of the slot machine 10 in which the player progresses the game. Therefore, as described above, by entrusting the operation of the player to determine whether the AT mode is successful or not based on the winning of the RB in the CZ mode, the AT mode can be enjoyed within a range not contrary to the real thrill of the game of the slot machine 10.例文帳に追加be able to.

As described above, comparing the 1st BB and 2nd BB capable of executing a 30-game bonus state with the RB capable of executing a 10-game bonus state, execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in either bonus state. However, the larger the number of games played, the easier it is to switch to the AT mode. By restricting the execution of the AT mode shift lottery during the bonus state, it is possible to prevent the advantage of the bonus state from increasing too much, and it is possible to suppress the increase in the ball output rate. In a configuration in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, it seems as if the opportunity for the transition lottery has been exploited, which may result in a player's desire to play. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by adopting a configuration in which it is easy to shift to the AT mode according to the number of games in the bonus state, it is possible to replace the limited transition lottery, and the gaming machine meets the expectations of the player. can be

During the bonus state, basically, the first combination for BB/RB wins with a high probability, and the second combination for BB/RB and the third combination for BB/RB rarely win. Therefore, basically, the number of games in the bonus state can be predicted in advance based on the first hand for BB/RB, and based on the prediction, the result of AT mode suitability based on the number of continuations of CZ mode. can be specified first. Therefore, before the bonus state is consumed, the result of whether or not the AT mode is appropriate can be notified in advance.

The AT mode determination based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode is performed when the start lever 41 is operated, and the fall lottery is performed when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and in each game, the AT mode based on the continuation number The judgment of whether or not the winner is a winner is configured to be performed prior to the fall lottery. By doing so, although the ceiling of the CZ mode was reached during the bonus state, after the bonus state ended, the CZ mode ended before the determination based on the number of CZ mode continuations, and the AT mode winning is not determined.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, on the premise that a lottery for transition to AT mode is performed during CZ mode, an example of notification in the case of a configuration in which simultaneous winning of 1st BB, 2nd BB, RB (especially RB) and AT mode is possible explain. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, in the AT mode shift lottery triggered by the overlapping results of the strong cherry etc. and the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and RB, and the independent results of these 1st BB, 2nd BB, and RB, Although the lottery table was set so as not to win the lottery (FIG. 38), in this modified example, it is set so that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode triggered by these duplicate results and single results can also be won. The winning probability of the transfer lottery based on these overlapping results and single results is arbitrary, but the winning results differ depending on the type of result, such as making it easier to win the transition lottery for results with a lower appearance rate. may be configured.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the bonus winning notification effect in this modified example.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the CZ mode is not in progress, the bonus type is grasped in step S3502, and a winning notification effect corresponding to the bonus type is generated in step S3503. If it is determined to be in the CZ mode in step S3501, after executing the process of grasping the bonus type in step S3504, it is determined whether or not RB winning in step S3505, 1 BB or 2 BB winning If so, in step S3506, a CZ winning notification effect for the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is generated. In this case, an AT mode first winning notification effect is generated. The processes of steps S3501 to S3506 are the same as the processes of steps S3301 to S3306.

If it is determined in step S3505 that RB has been won, in this modification, the process advances to step S3507 to determine whether simultaneous winning with AT mode has occurred. If simultaneous winning has not occurred, the number of CZ mode continuations is grasped at step S3508, and if 20 games or more at step S3509, a CZ middle winning notification effect for RB is generated at step S3510. In this case, an AT mode first winning notification effect is generated. If the number of games is less than 20, then in step S3511 a non-winning CZ medium winning notification effect is set, and in step S3512 a winning postponement flag is set. The processing of steps S3508 to S3512 is the same as the processing of steps S3307 to S3311.

If it is determined in step S3507 that the AT mode and AT mode are simultaneously won, the flow advances to step S3510 to generate an RB middle CZ winning notification effect. Also in this case, the AT mode first winning notification effect is generated.

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, by utilizing the fact that the success or failure of the AT mode shift lottery differs depending on the timing of the RB prize winning in the CZ mode, the AT mode first winning notification effect is performed when the RB winning notification is made. . In addition, in this modification, if simultaneous winning with AT mode occurs, regardless of the timing of RB winning/RB winning, AT mode first winning notification effect is generated at the time of RB winning notification. Thus, it is possible to give the impression that the AT mode winning notified by the AT mode first winning notification performance based on the number of CZ mode continuations is based on simultaneous winning, and the simultaneous winning is possible. It is possible to give the impression of winning based on the number of continuations of the CZ mode as if the first winning notification performance of the AT mode based on the first win is given. In other words, by notifying AT modes with different winning games in the same game (in the RB winning game) with similar content, the impression that the winning games are different is diluted and the winning opportunity is made difficult to understand. Winning can be made unexpected, and joy can be enhanced when the first winning notification performance is performed.

<Modification 2>
This modified example shows a modified example of RB. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the winning modes of various RBs and the contents of the RB states. In this modified example, the lottery table used in each game during the bonus state based on various RB prizes is the one of the first embodiment (FIG. 28).

In the first RB, a prize is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. and has the same content as the RB in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the second RB, the symbols corresponding to the left reel 32L are the “black BAR” symbol and the “red 7” symbol, and the symbol corresponding to the middle reel 32M is the “white bell” symbol. A "red bell" pattern and a "white bell" pattern are set for the right reel 32R. In other words, the left reel 32L has more corresponding symbols than the first RB, and is set so as to make it difficult for a player to miss a coin. On the other hand, the "white bell" symbol is placed sixth on the middle reel 32M, and the number of symbols arranged is the same as the "red 7" symbol on the first RB. The "white bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are both arranged within 4 symbols, and are set so as not to cause any omission. Summarizing these, it can be said that the second RB has a winning mode in which it is less likely that the player will miss a prize than the first RB.

In the 3rd RB, the corresponding symbols on the left reel are the “black BAR” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, and the “LUCKY” symbol, and the corresponding symbols on the middle reel 32M are the “first replay” symbol and the “ A "second replay" symbol is set, and the right reel 32R has a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol similar to those of the second RB. That is, the left reel 32L has more corresponding symbols than the second RB, and is set so as to make it even more difficult for the player to miss any symbols. Also, the "first replay" symbol and the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M are both arranged within 4 symbols, and are set so as not to cause any omission. Taking these into account, it can be said that the third RB has a winning mode in which it is less likely that the player will miss a prize than the second RB.

All of these 1st RB to 3rd RB are assumed to cause a transition to a bonus state with a payout upper limit of 90, and the advantages are the same. On the other hand, since the susceptibility to the occurrence of failures differs as described above, the degree of difficulty for confirming the winning of the AT mode, especially when winning during the CZ mode, differs.

That is, when the non-winning CZ middle winning notification effect occurs as described above, it is necessary to extend the bonus state based on the RB winning by dropping the RB until the winning notification effect for the post-RB postponement occurs. If the easiness of establishment of is different, the degree of difficulty of causing the failure will also be different. Then, the operation difficulty for confirming the winning of the AT mode during the CZ mode also differs.

That is, for the first RB winning, it is possible to prevent the corresponding symbols from stopping by performing the first specific operation, and for the second RB winning, the corresponding symbols can be stopped by performing the second specific operation. It is possible to prevent the third RB winning from stopping the corresponding symbols by operating the third specific operation. Since the second specific operation is set to be more difficult to operate than the first specific operation, and the third specific operation is set to be more difficult to operate than the second specific operation, the CZ mode is set. Depending on which RB is won in the game, the degree of difficulty for confirming AT mode winning will differ. Therefore, the interest in the CZ mode can be enhanced by, for example, hoping to win an RB with a low degree of difficulty during the CZ mode. Since it is possible to confirm mode winning, it is also possible to increase the motivation to operate by motivating technical improvement.

The fourth RB is composed of the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. ' symbol or the 'second replay' symbol stops on the activated line, the winning is established. On the other hand, the fifth RB has the “first replay” symbol or “second replay” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white bell” symbol or “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “white bell” on the right reel 32R. It is set as winning when the symbol or the "red bell" symbol stops on the active line. These are the "first replay" symbol and "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol and "second replay" symbol, the "white bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, The "first replay" symbol, "second replay" symbol, and "white bell" symbol and "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are all arranged within 4 symbols, and are set so as not to cause any omission. ing. In other words, the fourth RB and the fifth RB are RBs that will not be missed, and winning is established in the winning game.

The maximum payout number of the 4th RB is set to 90, the maximum payout number of the 5th RB is set to 180, and the number of medals obtainable in the bonus state is greater in the 5th RB than in the 4th RB. Furthermore, since the number of continuous games during the bonus state is 20 games in the fifth RB and 10 games in the fourth RB, the number of continuous games is longer in the fifth RB than in the fourth RB. As a result, it is easier to determine the winning of the AT mode when the 5th RB is won than when the 4th RB is won during the CZ mode. That is, in the 4th RB, AT mode winning is confirmed if the winning is after the 20th game in the CZ mode, while in the 5th RB, the AT mode winning is confirmed if the winning is after the 10th game in the CZ mode. In this way, it is possible to vary the probability of winning the AT mode even by the number of continuous games in the bonus state.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the lottery table used in each game during the bonus state is changed according to the type of RB that has been won (a prize won). Here, as various RBs, first to third RBs will be described as examples. As for the winning mode of the first RB to the third RB, the first RB to the third RB of the modified example 2 may be used, or another winning mode may be used. Also, the maximum payout numbers of the first RB to the third RB are all assumed to be 90.

FIG. 87(a) shows part of the lottery table for the first RB state. "65516" is set as the point value PV of IV=29, and "10" is set as the point values PV of IV=30 and 31, respectively. Therefore, in the first RB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB/RB (probability of winning when IV = 29) is about 1/1.00, and the second role in BB/RB and BB・The probability of winning the 3rd role in the RB (probability of winning when IV = 30, 31) is about 1/6560, and no event will occur. In this case, the probability of winning the first role in BB/RB in which nine medals are paid out is about 1/1.00 as described above, and the average number of continuous games during the first RB state (average staying game number) is about 10 games as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 87(b) shows part of the lottery table for the second RB state. "32768" is set as the point value PV of IV=29, and "16384" is set as the point values PV of IV=30 and 31, respectively. Therefore, in the second RB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB/RB (probability of winning when IV = 29) is about 1/2.00, and the second role in BB/RB and BB・The probability of winning the 3rd role in the RB (probability of winning when IV=30.1) is about 1/4.00, and there is no event of losing. In this case, the probability of winning the first role in the BB/RB where nine medals are paid out is about 1/2.00 as described above, and the average number of continuous games during the second RB state (average staying game number) is about 20 games longer than the first RB state.

FIG. 87(c) shows part of the lottery table for the third RB state. "21846" is set as the point value PV of IV=29, and "21845" is set as the point values PV of IV=30 and 31, respectively. Therefore, in the 3rd RB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB/RB (probability of winning when IV=29) is about 1/3.00, and the second role in BB/RB and BB・The probability of winning the 3rd role in the RB (probability of winning when IV=30.1) is about 1/3.00, and there is no event of losing. In this case, the probability of winning the first role in the BB/RB where 9 medals are paid out is about 1/3.00 as described above, and the average number of continuous games during the 3rd RB state (average staying game number) is about 30 games longer than the first RB state and the second RB state.

As described above, it is also possible to vary the probability of winning the AT mode by varying the odds of winning a minor combination during the transition to the RB state. In this case, the 1st BB/RB hand is set as the winning hand in which medals are paid out, and the 2nd hand in BB/RB and the 3rd hand in BB/RB, which are not subject to medal payout, are set as other winning hands. By increasing or decreasing the winning probability, the number of continuous games can be changed as described above. becomes a configuration in which there are many. By doing so, it is possible to change the number of continuous games with a relatively simple configuration such as adjusting the winning probability of the 1st BB/RB to the 3rd BB/RB. However, it is possible to vary the AT mode winning rate without varying the number of medals paid out during the RB state minus the number of medals used in each game.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, a modified example of effects during the RB state will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the RB effect processing in this modified example. The RB effect processing is performed in the display control device 81, for example, as one process in step S2718 of the effect setting processing at all stop (FIG. 62) at the end of each game.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not RB winning has been established by grasping the result of stopping the game this time. If the RB winning has been established, the process advances to step S3602 to determine whether or not the RB winning in the CZ mode. If it is not in the CZ mode, then in step S3603 processing for setting the effect at the start of the normal RB is performed. In the normal RB start effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "REGULAR-BONUS". In addition, in the normal RB start effect, control is performed so that the speaker 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice saying "Yes!"). After that, in step S3604, after executing the process of setting the normal effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a, the present RB effect process is ended. The normal effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the normal effect is to be performed as the effect during the current RB state.

If it is determined in step S3602 that the RB prize is won in the CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S3605. In step S3605, a process for grasping the number of continuations of the CZ mode is executed. Then, in step S3606, it is determined whether or not the current number of continuous CZ modes is 20 games or more, that is, whether or not the number of continuous CZ modes will reach 30 due to the RB winning this time. judge. When the number of continuous CZ modes is 20 games or more, the process advances to step S3607 to perform processing for setting an effect at the start of RB for AT winning. In the effect at the start of the RB for winning AT, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "REGULAR-BONUS" and the characters "AT confirmed". In addition, in the performance at the start of RB for AT winning, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "I did it, AT confirmed!") is emitted from the speaker 64. FIG. After that, in step S3608, after executing the process of setting the winning effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a, this RB effect process is ended. The winning effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the AT winning effect is to be performed as the effect during the current RB state.

If it is determined in step S3606 that the number of continuous CZ modes has not reached 20 games, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, the minimum number of games in the RB state based on the RB that won this time is subtracted to grasp the number of remaining games up to 30 games, which is the ceiling of the CZ mode, and the grasped number of remaining games is displayed in various counter areas 183b. is input to the remaining counter provided in . For example, if the number of CZ mode continuations at the time of RB winning is 17 games, the number of games to reach the ceiling is 13 games, and "3" corresponds to 3 games after subtracting 10 games, which is the minimum number of games in the RB state. into the remaining counter. Then, in step S3610, a process of setting the effect at the start of RB for AT chance is performed.

In the AT chance RB starting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), a battle start effect is performed in which a soldier's main character holding a weapon is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the display is switched to the line of sight of the main character, and a fighting effect is performed in which a plurality of zombies attacking the main character as enemy characters is displayed. In the during-battle production, an enemy number display indicating the number of enemy characters is displayed side by side with the enemy characters in addition to the enemy characters. The enemy number display is composed of, for example, the number of defeated enemy characters and the number of enemy characters at the start, and corresponds to the remaining counter input in step S3609. For example, if the value input to the remaining counter in step S3609 is "5", the number of enemy characters at the start is five, the number of defeated enemy characters is zero, and the number of enemies displayed is "0/". 5” is displayed. In addition, in the AT chance RB start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Battle Start! Defeat the enemy!") is emitted from the speaker 64. FIG. After that, in step S3611, after executing the process of setting the chance effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a, this RB effect process is ended. The chance effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the AT chance effect is to be performed as the effect during the current RB state.

If it is determined in step S3601 that the RB prize has not been established in the current game, the process proceeds to step S3612. In step S3612, it is determined whether or not the current game is already in the RB state. If it is not in the RB state, the effect processing for RB is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the RB state, it proceeds to step S3613 and determines whether or not the normal effect flag is set, that is, whether or not it is in the RB state in which the prize is won outside of the CZ mode. . When the flag for normal effect is set, in step S3614, the effect is set so that the effect during the normal RB is performed (so that the effect is performed in the next game), and then the effect for the main RB is set. End the process. In the normal RB production, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a predetermined animation production, and controls the speaker 64 so that the corresponding effect sound (for example, predetermined music) is emitted.

If it is determined in step S3613 that the normal effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3615. In step S3615, it is determined whether or not the winning effect flag is set. If the winning effect flag is set, in step S3616, after setting so that the effect during the RB for AT winning is performed (so that the effect is performed in the next game), the flag for the main RB is set. Terminate the production process. In the effect during the RB for AT winning, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a predetermined live-action moving image effect, and control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, a popular song sung by a woman) is emitted from the speaker 64. .

A negative determination in step S3615 means that the chance effect flag is set, and that the battle start effect and the during-battle effect are being performed when the RB is won. In this case, in step S3617, the setting is made so that the effect during RB for AT chance is performed (so that the effect is performed in the next game as well). In the AT-chance RB mid-effect, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the above-described during-battle effect is performed.

In the subsequent step S3618, it is determined whether or not a special role winning has been established based on the result of stopping the game this time. A special combination is a combination that pays out less or no number of payouts than the main combination (1st combination for BB/RB), or a combination that is not subject to payout (replay, etc.). indicate. In this embodiment, the 2nd combination for BB/RB and the 3rd combination for BB/RB are the 9th re-game or the 10th re-game, and correspond to specific combinations that are not payout targets. That is, in step S3618, it is determined whether or not the result of the current game is the ninth regame win or the tenth regame win. When the winning of the first small winning combination corresponding to the first winning combination for BB/RB is established instead of the ninth replay winning award or the tenth replay winning award, the RB effect processing is terminated as it is. If the ninth replay or the tenth replay win has been established, the process proceeds to step S3619.

In step S3619, setting is made so that a chance effect is performed. In the chance effect, for example, the display contents of the enemy number display are updated in correspondence with the winning of a special role, and the auxiliary display section 65 performs a damage imparting effect showing how the corresponding number of enemy characters have been defeated. set. In the damage imparting effect, as shown in FIG. 90(a), some of the plurality of enemy characters are blown backward, and "NICE!!" is displayed to congratulate them. is displayed. The display of the number of enemies is updated so that the number of defeated enemy characters is added by one each time the specific role wins.

In the subsequent step S3620, a process of subtracting 1 from the remaining counter is performed in correspondence with the winning of a special combination. Then, in step S3621, it is determined whether or not the remaining counter has become zero. If it is not 0, the effect processing for RB is terminated as it is. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the in-battle effect in the AT chance RB effect continues with the enemy number display updated.

When it is determined in step S3621 that the remaining counter has reached 0, in step S3622, the AT winning effect is set to be performed. In the AT win effect, as shown in FIG. 91(a), as a battle victory effect, a soldier who is the main character is shown yelling, and the word "WIN" is displayed to indicate that the main character has won. Character display is performed. When the battle victory effect is executed, the number of enemy characters displayed is "5/5" to indicate that the number of defeated enemy characters has reached the number of enemy characters at the start. After that, in step S3623, the chance effect flag is cleared and the win effect flag is set, and then this RB effect process is ended. In this case, in the next process, an affirmative determination is made in step S3615, and an effect during RB for AT winning is set.

Incidentally, when the maximum number of payouts in the RB state is reached without the remaining counter reaching 0, a battle defeat effect may be performed as the ending effect in the RB state. As for the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 91(b), a scene in which the main character, a soldier, is lying face down is displayed, and the text "LOSE" is displayed to indicate that the main character has been defeated. will be

Also, the number of enemies displayed above does not have to correspond to the remaining counter on a one-to-one basis. The display may be "0/100", and the number of defeated enemy characters may be subtracted at a rate corresponding to the value of the remaining counter.

Furthermore, it may be configured to generate an effect of receiving an attack from an enemy character as the bonus progresses (as the number of remaining bonus games decreases).

In this manner, in the structure in which the RB state ends when the payout upper limit is reached, a result different from the main payout result (first combination for BB/RB, predetermined combination) during the RB state, and the main payout The number of medals paid out at the time of winning is less than the result, or medals are not paid out, or as a result of not being paid out, the winning of a specific role (2nd role for BB/RB, 3rd role for BB/RB) If established, the number of games played during the RB state is extended by that amount. In other words, when the RB wins during the CZ mode, it is possible to approach the 30 games, which is the ceiling of the CZ mode, by the amount of establishment of the special win.

At the time of RB winning, it is configured to grasp how many times a special winning prize must be established during the RB state to reach the ceiling of CZ mode, and to display the number of enemies based on the grasping result, so that the player can enter CZ mode. It is possible to clearly grasp the necessary number of times to win a specific role up to the ceiling. Since the display of the number of enemies is updated based on the winning of a special combination, it is possible to make it easier to experience the change in the appearance of approaching the ceiling in the CZ mode.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, it is possible to win both a result with a large number of paid out medals and a result with a small number of paid out medals during the RB state. FIG. 92(a) is a diagram showing part of the RB state lottery table in this modification.

In this modification, in addition to the 1st to 3rd BB/RB wins with index values IV of 29 to 31 in the RB state, the pressing order bells with index values of IV=21 to 28 are won. It is configured to obtain As already explained, when the bell is won in the pressing order, depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first minor winning combination in which nine medals are paid out is established, or the third winning combination in which three medals are paid out is established. 2nd to 26th minor wins are established, or a dropout occurs where medals are not paid out (transitional rolls are stopped).

FIG. 92(b) shows a case where all the games in the RB state win the push order bell, and a case where the first minor win is established in all the games, and a case where the second minor win is established in all the games. It conceptually shows the difference in the number of games in the RB state from the case of winning a winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination.

That is, for example, in the RB state started at timing ta, if the first minor winning combination is established in all games, 9 medals are paid out in each game, so the upper limit number of payouts in the RB state It takes 10 games to reach 90 cards. That is, the RB state ends at timing tb, which is 10 games after timing ta. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode drop lottery are restarted at the timing tb.

On the other hand, in the RB state started at the timing of ta, if any one of the 2nd to 26th small wins is established in all games, 3 medals are paid out in each game. , 30 games are required to reach 90, which is the upper limit of the number of payouts in the RB state. That is, the RB state ends at the timing tc, which is 30 games after the timing ta. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode fall lottery are restarted at the timing of tc.

In this manner, in the configuration where the lottery results for each game during the RB state include a result with a large payout amount and a result with a smaller payout amount, the number of games during the RB state differs depending on which result wins. Fewer results means more games.

During the RB state, the game is played as a 3-bet game, so if any of the 2nd to 26th minor wins are won and three medals are paid out, medals increase. do not have. That is, when any one of the 2nd to 26th small wins is established in all games as described above, even if 90 medals, which is the upper limit of the payout number, is paid out, in the RB state. The number of medals that can actually be obtained is 0, and an increase in medals cannot be expected.

In other words, from the viewpoint of aiming to win medals in the RB state, it is preferable to win as a result of a large number of payouts in each game. It is preferable that a prize is established as a result of a small number of payouts. In this way, even if the number of wins is small, AT mode winning is likely to occur, and even if it is difficult to win AT mode, the number of wins is large. can be optimized.

As already explained, when the pressing order bell is won during the AT mode, the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is generated. On the other hand, if the pressing order bell is won in the CZ mode or the normal mode, the pressing order notification is not generated. If this modified example is applied to a configuration in which pressing order notification is possible during the RB state, when the RB state occurs during the AT mode, the pressing order notification can occur during the RB state. In other words, it is possible to establish the first minor winning combination in each game, and the RB state ends after about 10 games. On the other hand, if the RB state occurs during the CZ mode, the press order notification does not occur during the RB state. Therefore, in each game, the 1st minor winning combination is established, or any of the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination is established, and the RB state can be longer than 10 games. Therefore, in the AT mode, the RB state is a state where medal acquisition can be expected, and in the CZ mode, the AT mode transition can be expected rather than medal acquisition, and even in the same RB state, the effect varies depending on the transition situation. will be different.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, depending on the type of bonus, the presence or absence of restrictions on the lottery relating to the instruction function during the bonus state is changed. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of each bonus.

As described in the first embodiment, in the first BB, the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. It is set so that winning is established by doing so. The winning opportunities include duplicate winning with so-called rare roles such as strong cherry duplication 1 (IV = 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44), special reply A duplication 1 (IV = 46), Special reply AB duplication 1 (IV = 47) and single winning (IV = 59) are set. Other than that, there is no set difference in the winning probability (Fig. 37).

As for the second BB, as described in the first embodiment, the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. It is set so that winning is established by doing so. As the winning opportunity, double winning with so-called rare roles such as strong cherry duplication 2 (IV = 33, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43, 45) and special reply A duplication 2 (IV = 48), Special reply AB duplication 2 (IV = 49) and single winning (IV = 60) are set. It is a special reply AB duplication 2, and other than that, there is no set difference in the winning probability (Fig. 37).

Furthermore, as for RB, as described in the first embodiment, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. It is set so that the prize is established by stopping at . The winning opportunities include duplicate winning with so-called rare roles such as strong cherry duplication 3 (IV = 50 to 56), special reply A duplication 3 (IV = 57), and special reply AB duplication 3 (IV = 58). and single winning (IV = 61) are set, and among them, the set difference in winning probability is provided for duplicate winning with rare role and special reply AB duplicate 3, and others There is no set difference in the winning probability (Fig. 37).

In this embodiment, in the bonus state triggered by the result of setting difference in the winning probability, the execution of the lottery for the instruction function is restricted, and the result of not setting the winning probability is triggered. In the bonus state of , the execution of the lottery for the instruction function shall be permitted. In the following description, a bonus that restricts execution of a lottery related to the instruction function will be referred to as a restricted bonus, and a bonus that allows execution of a lottery related to the instruction function will be referred to as a non-restricted bonus.

In other words, in the 1 BB, the 1 BB state triggered by duplicate winning with rare role, special reply A duplicate 1 or single winning is a non-limiting bonus, and the 1 BB state triggered by special reply AB duplicate 1 is limited Target bonus. Also, in the 2 BB, the 2 BB state triggered by special reply A duplicate 2 or single winning is a non-limiting bonus, and the 2 BB state triggered by duplicate winning with rare role or special reply AB duplicate 2 is limited Target bonus. And in RB, the RB state triggered by special reply A duplicate 3 or single winning is a non-restricted bonus, and the RB state triggered by duplicate winning with a rare role or special reply AB duplicate 3 is a restricted bonus. Become.

In the limited bonuses in the CZ mode, as the instruction function-related lottery, not only the lottery for transition to the AT mode but also the drop lottery is restricted, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the non-restricted bonus in the CZ mode, it is allowed to implement the transfer lottery and the fall lottery to these AT modes regarding the instruction function.

In this embodiment, a new playability is created by using a configuration in which these restricted bonuses and non-restricted bonuses are mixed.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the instruction function in the non-limiting bonus is performed, for example, with the 2nd combination of BB/RB or the 3rd combination of BB/RB as a trigger, and the winning probability is arbitrary.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the bonus winning notification effect in this embodiment.

In step S3701, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode is on. If the mode is not the CZ mode, the bonus type is grasped in step S3702, and the win notification effect corresponding to the grasped bonus type is set in step S3703. These steps S3701 to S3703 are the same as the steps S3301 to S3303.

If it is determined in step S3701 that the mode is the CZ mode, the process advances to step S3704 to execute the process of grasping the bonus type in the same manner as in step S3304. Then, in step S3705, it is determined whether or not it is RB. If it is the 1st BB or the 2nd BB instead of the RB, the process advances to step S3703 to set the winning notification effect corresponding to the bonus type. That is, in this embodiment, when the winning bonus is the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, a similar winning notification effect is generated regardless of whether the CZ mode is in progress. In this embodiment, when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the AT mode first winning notification effect does not occur.

If it is determined in step S3705 that RB is won, the process advances to step S3706 to perform setting processing of winning notification effect according to the number of continuations of CZ mode in steps S3706 to S3710. These steps S3706 to S3710 are the same as steps S3307 to S3311.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the first BB state or the second BB state occurs during the CZ mode, along with the bonus effect in the first BB state or the second BB state, A CZ mode effect is performed. For example, in the display effect as a bonus effect by the auxiliary display part 65, by displaying "in CZ mode" at the upper end and the lower end of the auxiliary display part 65, or by changing the background color of the display effect, etc., , the configuration is such that it gives an impression that it is in the CZ mode.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the CZ mode processing in this embodiment. In the CZ mode processing in this embodiment, in particular, the processing when winning the drop lottery during the non-limiting bonus and the lottery according to the number of continuous CZ modes in the non-limiting bonus are performed during the bonus state. The processing for and are different from those of the first embodiment.

That is, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the fallen flag has been set, and if it has been set, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, processing for clearing the CZ mode flag is executed, and in step S3803, processing for determining whether or not the bonus state is in progress is executed. If it is not in the bonus state, in step S3804 a process for setting a CZ mode end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process ends. In this case, as described above, the CZ mode end notification effect is generated in the game subsequent to the current game.

If it is determined in step S3803 that the player is in the bonus state, it means that the falling lottery during the non-limiting bonus has been won. In this case, in step S3805, a process for setting the CZ mode end command during BB as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process is ended. The CZ mode end command during BB is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the CZ mode has ended during the bonus state. Although a detailed description of the processing of the display control device 81 that has received the command to end the CZ mode during BB is omitted, an auxiliary display is provided so as to generate a CZ mode end notification effect in the first game after the end of this bonus. It controls the unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like. Also, when the CZ mode ends, control is performed so as not to end the performance during the CZ mode. For example, based on the reception of the CZ mode end command during BB, the CPU 181 sets a flag for specifying that the command has been received in the various flag storage areas 183a, and by confirming the flag, CZ It is preferable that the effect during the mode is continued, and whether or not to generate the CZ mode end notification effect is determined depending on the presence or absence of the flag when the bonus ends.

If it is determined in step S3801 that the fallen flag has not been set, the process advances to step S3806. In step S3806, processing for adding the number of CZ mode continuations is executed. Then, in step S3807, it is determined whether or not the number of continuations of the CZ mode is the number of continuations (19) that triggers the fall lottery execution in the next game. After executing the process of setting the lottery flag, the CZ mode process is terminated. If it is not the number of continuations that triggers the fall lottery execution, it is determined in step S3809 whether the number of continuations of the CZ mode is the number of continuations (29) that confirms winning the AT mode lottery in the next game. do. If so, in step S3810, it is determined whether any bonus carryover conditions are in effect. If it is not in the bonus carryover state, it is determined in step S3811 whether or not the limited bonus is in progress.

If it is not in the bonus state, or if it is not a restricted bonus but a non-restricted bonus even in the bonus state, the process proceeds to step S3812, and AT mode winning processing (steps S3812 to S3814) is executed. The processing of steps S3812 to S3814 is the same as the processing of steps S3109 to S3911. After that, in step S3815, after the notification postponement command is output to the display control device 81, this process ends. The notification postponement command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the winning of the lottery for transition to the AT mode has occurred during the bonus state. Although a detailed description of the processing of the display control device 81 that has received the notification postponement command is omitted, the auxiliary display unit 65 and It controls the speaker 64 and the like. Further, when the AT mode is won, if the AT mode is in the CZ mode, control is performed so as not to end the effect in the CZ mode. For example, based on the reception of the notification postpone command, a flag for the CPU 181 to specify that the command has been received is set in various flag storage areas 183a, and by checking the flag, CZ mode The effect may be continued, and whether or not to generate the AT mode winning notification effect may be determined depending on the presence or absence of the flag at the end of the bonus.

If the number of CZ mode continuations is not 29 in step S3809, the CZ processing ends. Also, even if the number of continuous CZ modes is 29, if the bonus is carried over in step S3810 or if the limited bonus is in progress in step S3811, the processing for winning the AT mode is performed. is not executed, and the CZ mode processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the AT mode lottery process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3901, it is determined whether or not the end CZ flag is set. As already described, the end CZ flag is a flag that is set in step S1721 when the CZ mode flag is set in the bonus end game (FIG. 50).

If the end time CZ flag is not set, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not there is any bonus carryover state. If none of the bonuses are carried over, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the restricted bonuses are in progress. If it is not in the bonus state, or if it is in the non-restricted bonus even if it is in the bonus state, a negative determination is made in step S3903, and the flow advances to step S3904 to perform drop lottery processing and AT mode lottery processing. process.

That is, in step S3904, it is determined whether or not the falling lottery flag is set, and if it is set, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game is a transition opportunity (step S3905). ). If it is not a transition opportunity role, a CZ mode fall lottery is executed (step S3906), and if a fall win is made (step S3907: YES), a process of setting a fallen flag is executed (step S3908), the AT mode lottery process ends.

On the other hand, if the fall flag is not set (step S3904: NO), if the transition trigger role is won (step S3905: YES), or if the fall is not won (step S3907: NO), the AT mode transition lottery is executed (step S3909). These steps S3904 to S3909 are the same as the steps S3203 to S3208.

After executing the AT mode shift lottery in step S3909, it is determined in step S3910 whether or not the AT mode shift lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S3911, after executing the process of setting the notification postponement command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the AT mode lottery process ends.

If the AT mode has not been won in step S3910, the AT mode lottery process is ended as it is. Note that the processing of these steps S3910 to S3911 may be configured to be executed in 812 of the first special combination processing.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3912. In step S3912, it is determined whether or not the bonus for which the end time CZ flag is set is a restricted bonus. Note that this determination is made by determining the bonus when the CZ flag at the end is set, and setting a flag corresponding to information as to whether or not the bonus is restricted in the various flag storage areas 106d. It is preferable that the configuration is performed by checking the flag. If it is a restricted bonus, it is determined in step S3913 whether or not the number of CZ mode continuations is 29 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S3912 or step S3913, the process advances to step S3902 to perform normal AT mode lottery processing. The processing of steps S3913 to S3916 is the same as the processing of steps S3209 to S3212.

In the case of the processing configuration as described above, the aspect of notification of winning in the AT mode after the CZ mode in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 96 to 100. FIG.

First, a description will be given of the notice of winning the AT mode when the number of continuous CZ modes reaches 30 during the restricted bonus.

In the CZ mode started at the timing of t31, if the bonus is won at the timing of t32, execution of the lottery for transition to the AT mode is restricted during the bonus carry-over state until the timing of t33. Further, even if a bonus prize is won at the timing of t33, since the bonus is a restricted bonus, execution of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode remains restricted. At the timing of t34, even if the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the number that triggers the start of the drop lottery, the drop lottery is not started because the restricted bonus is in progress. Also, even if the number of CZ mode continuations reaches the number at which the AT mode winning is confirmed at the timing of t35, the AT mode winning is not confirmed because the bonus is restricted, and the CZ mode is continue. After that, when the bonus ends at the timing of t36, an AT mode transition lottery is performed, and the AT mode transition is determined based on the number of CZ mode continuations. This point is the same as the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as described above, when the BB winning is announced, the AT mode first winning announcement effect is not performed. The AT mode winning notification effect is set to occur in the next game after the game at t36 when the bonus state ends.

Further, in this embodiment, the CZ mode effect is continued even during the bonus state. Therefore, when the CZ mode is started at the timing of t31, the effect in the CZ mode is also started, and when the bonus win at t32 or the bonus prize at t33 is triggered, the effect in the CZ mode continues without ending. be done. Then, the effect during the CZ mode is continuously performed until the end of the bonus at t36.

Next, a description will be given of notification of winning the AT mode when winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode during the non-limiting bonus.

In the CZ mode started at the timing of t41, if the bonus is won at the timing of t42, execution of the lottery for transition to the AT mode is restricted during the bonus carry-over state until the timing of t43. This point is the same for the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus. On the other hand, when a bonus prize is won at the timing of t43, since the bonus is a non-restricted bonus, execution of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is allowed. Further, when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the number that triggers the start of the falling lottery at the timing of t44, the falling lottery is started because the unrestricted bonus is in progress. For example, if the AT mode transition lottery is won at the timing t45, which is the timing before the number of CZ mode continuations reaches the number at which the AT mode winning is confirmed, the CZ mode ends at the timing t45. do. However, in this case, since the notification postponement command is output, the effect in the CZ mode is continued. Even if the provisional number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 at the timing of t46, the CZ mode has already ended and the winning of the AT mode has already been confirmed. Then, when the bonus state of the non-limiting bonus ends at the timing of t47, the effect in the CZ mode ends, and AT mode winning notification is generated in the next game of the bonus state game. In other words, in the restricted bonus, the effect mode is common to the case where the AT mode win is confirmed based on the number of CZ mode continuations.

Next, a description will be given of an AT mode winning notification when the number of CZ mode continuations reaches 30 during a non-limiting bonus.

In the CZ mode started at the timing of t51, if the bonus is won at the timing of t52, execution of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is restricted during the bonus carry-over state until the timing of t53. When a bonus prize is won at the timing of t53, since the bonus is a non-restricted bonus, execution of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is permitted. Further, when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the number that triggers the start of the falling lottery at the timing of t54, the falling lottery is started because the unrestricted bonus is in progress. For example, until the timing of t55 when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the number at which the winning of the AT mode is confirmed, if neither the falling lottery nor the AT mode transition lottery is won, the number of continuations of the CZ mode is reached at the timing of t55. Based on this, AT mode winning is determined. In this case, the CZ mode ends at the timing of t55. However, in this case, since the notification postponement command is output, the effect in the CZ mode is continued. Then, when the bonus state of the non-limiting bonus ends at the timing of t56, the effect in the CZ mode ends, and AT mode winning notification is generated in the next game of the bonus state game. In other words, in the limited bonus, the case where AT mode winning is confirmed based on the number of CZ mode continuations, and the production mode are common, and furthermore, in the non-limiting bonus, the AT mode Even when the transfer lottery is won, the presentation mode is common.

Next, a description will be given of notification in the case of winning the falling lottery during the non-limiting bonus.

In the CZ mode started at the timing of t61, if the bonus is won at the timing of t62, execution of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is restricted during the bonus carry-over state until the timing of t63. If a bonus prize is won at the timing of t63, since the bonus is a non-restricted bonus, execution of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is allowed. Further, when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the number that triggers the start of the falling lottery at the timing of t64, the falling lottery is started because the non-limiting bonus is in progress. For example, if the fall lottery is won at timing t65, which is the timing before the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches the number at which winning of the AT mode is determined, the CZ mode ends at timing t65. However, in this case, since the CZ mode end command during BB is output, the effect in the CZ mode is continued. Even if the provisional number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 at the timing t66, since the CZ mode has already ended, winning the AT mode is not confirmed. Then, when the bonus state of the non-limiting bonus ends at the timing of t67, the effect in the CZ mode ends, and the CZ mode end notification effect occurs in the next game of the bonus state game. That is, in this case, it is difficult to determine not only whether or not the AT mode has been won, but also whether or not the CZ mode is actually continuing until the bonus ends, from the presentation mode.

As described above, as types of bonus status, a limited bonus with a difference in winning probability in the set value and a non-limited bonus with no difference in winning probability in the set value are provided. While restricting the execution of the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode drop lottery during the state, in the non-restricted bonus, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode drop lottery during the bonus state is allowed. Even if the bonus state of the game is the 1st BB or the 2nd BB in which the bonus state can be executed, the winning of the AT mode based on the number of CZ mode continuations is not confirmed during the bonus state, and the bonus type is a limited bonus, Alternatively, it is possible to have an interesting game property such as expecting AT mode winning while predicting whether it is a non-restricted bonus.

In particular, in the non-restricted bonus, the AT mode lottery can be performed even during the bonus state, and the winning notification when winning the AT mode lottery during this bonus state is the number of CZ mode continuations in the restricted bonus. Since the AT mode winning notification and the notification mode are made common, the number of AT mode winning path prediction branches increases, and the playability of the prediction is enhanced. In addition, since it becomes difficult to distinguish between a limited bonus and a non-limited bonus, it becomes difficult to grasp the appearance rate of a limited bonus that has a different probability of winning depending on the set value. As a result, even in a game in which set values are predicted, the branch of prediction is increased and the playability is enhanced.

<Modification>
In this modification, whether or not the CZ mode effect is continued in the restricted bonus or the non-limitable bonus and whether or not the AT mode winning notification effect is postponed differ depending on the stop result of the BB winning game. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the winning game winning result handling process in this modified example. The winning game winning result handling process is a process that is executed each time the winning result handling process (FIG. 48) is activated.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the game is a bonus winning game. More specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the RB winning flag has been set in the current game. If none of the winning flags have been set, or even if they have been set, if they have already been set in the previous game (carried over), the winning result handling process will continue. finish.

If it is a bonus winning game, the process proceeds to step S4002. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode is in progress. If the CZ mode is not in progress, the process for dealing with winning results is terminated. If it is a bonus winning game in the CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S4003.

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag has been set. If the 1st BB winning flag is set, it is determined in step S4004 whether or not the ninth regame winning has been established as the winning result of the current game. If the ninth re-game winning has been established, that is, if the 1 BB winning opportunity of this time is special reply A duplication 1 or special reply AB duplication 1 (FIG. 93), proceed to step S4005 and continue CZ mode production Executes the process of setting the command as an output target to the display control device 81, and in step S4006, executes the process of setting the command at the end of AT winning notification as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the main winning Terminate the result handling process. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode continuation command sets to continue the CZ mode being executed, and when the AT mode winning is confirmed during this bonus state, the CZ mode ends or the CZ mode Even when the CZ mode is ended by winning the falling lottery, the CZ mode performance being executed is controlled to be continued at least until the bonus end game. The display control device 81 that has received the AT winning notification termination command does not generate the AT mode winning notification performance during the bonus state even if the AT mode winning is confirmed during the current bonus state, and ends the bonus. controlled to occur at times. That is, as shown in the second embodiment, the CZ mode effect continues during the bonus state, and whether the AT mode is appropriate (whether or not the CZ mode ends) is determined after the bonus ends.

If it is determined in step S4004 that the ninth re-game winning has not been established, it is determined in step S4007 whether or not the tenth re-game winning has been established as the winning result of the current game. When the 10th regame winning has not been established, that is, when the 1st BB winning opportunity of this time is other than the special reply AB duplication 1, the process proceeds to step S4008, and the CZ mode effect continuation command is output to the display control device 81 In step S4009, along with executing the process of setting as the object, after executing the process of setting the AT winning notification winning command as the output object to the display control device 81, the winning result handling process ends. The aspect of the display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode effect continuation command is as described above. The display control device 81, which has received the AT mode winning notification winning command, causes the AT mode winning notification effect to occur in the game in which the AT mode winning is confirmed when the AT mode winning is confirmed during the bonus state. Control. It should be noted that when the AT winning notification winning command is received, the effect in the CZ mode is terminated based on the generation of the AT mode winning notification effect. That is, the CZ mode effect continues during the bonus state, and when the AT mode win is confirmed, the AT mode win notification effect is generated in the game, and the CZ mode effect ends.

If the 10th replay win has been established in step S4007, that is, if the 1st BB winning opportunity of this time is special reply AB duplication 1, the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, a process of setting a CZ mode effect end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Then, in step S4011, after executing the process of setting the AT winning notification winning command as an output target to the display control device 81, the winning result corresponding process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode effect end command controls to end the CZ mode effect being executed. The display control device 81 in the case of receiving the AT win notification winning command grasps the number of continuous games in the bonus state in which the winning was made at the time of the bonus winning, and when the continuous number of the CZ mode reaches 30 during the bonus state. generates an AT mode first winning notification performance when the bonus is won. In other words, the CZ mode effect is terminated based on the winning of the bonus, and the first winning notification effect of the AT mode can occur.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the 1st BB winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4012. In step S4012, a process of determining whether or not the second BB winning flag is set is executed. If the second BB winning flag is set and the game is the second BB winning game, the process advances to step S4013, and the winning result of the current game is the ninth replay winning, or a so-called dropout result in which no winning has been established. It is determined whether or not. If the 9th regame win or dropout result cannot narrow down the winning opportunity for the 2nd BB winning this time, the process proceeds to step S4014, and the above CZ mode effect continuation command is output to the display control device 81. Along with the setting, in step S4015, after executing the process of setting the AT winning notification end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result handling process is ended. In this case, as shown in the second embodiment, the CZ mode effect continues during the bonus state, and whether the AT mode is appropriate (whether or not the CZ mode ends) is determined after the bonus ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S4012 and the current game is an RB winning game, the process proceeds to step S4014, where the CZ mode effect continues during the bonus state, and whether the AT mode is appropriate (whether or not the CZ mode has ended). is determined after the bonus ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4013, the process advances to step S4016 to determine whether or not the winning result of the current game is a tenth replay winning prize or a rare combination winning prize. If a negative determination is made in step S4013 and there is no 10th replay win or rare combination win, that is, if the current game win result is a 2BB win, the process proceeds to step S4017. In step S4017, a CZ mode effect continuation command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Then, in step S4018, after executing the process of setting the AT win notification winning time command as an output target to the display control device 81, the winning result corresponding process is terminated. In this case, as described above, the CZ mode effect continues during the bonus state, and when the AT mode winning is confirmed, the AT mode winning notification effect occurs in the game, and the CZ mode effect ends.

If it is determined in step S4016 that the 10th re-game winning prize or rare combination winning prize, the process proceeds to step S4019, sets the CZ mode effect end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and AT wins in step S4020 After executing the process of setting the informing winning command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result handling process is terminated. In this case, as described above, the CZ mode effect is terminated based on the bonus winning, and the AT mode first winning notification effect can occur.

Thus, the content of the effect during the bonus state differs depending on the winning mode (stopped number) in the bonus winning game during the CZ mode. FIG. 102 shows the relationship between the winning mode (stopped number) in the bonus winning game, the presence or absence of continuation of the CZ mode effect, and the timing of AT winning notification.

As already explained, in the 1st BB, a prize is established by stopping with the "red 7" symbols aligned on the active line, and in the 2nd BB, winning is established by stopping with the "white BAR" symbols aligned on the activated line. . Therefore, the player can clearly grasp which bonus is selected from the winning mode. The 1st BB and the 2nd BB are set with a single winning role and a double winning role. Duplication 1, 2, etc.), special reply A duplication 1, 2 which is a duplication with the 9th replay, special reply AB duplication 1, 2 which is a duplication with the 9th replay and the 10th replay are set. ing.

The single winning hand and special reply A overlapping 1 and 2 are set so that there is no difference in the winning probability for both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the 1st BB and the 1st BB triggered by these hands 2BB is a non-restricted bonus that does not limit the draw for the pointing function. In addition, for special reply AB duplication 1 and 2, there is a set difference in the winning probability for both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the 1st BB and the 2nd BB triggered by the role will be a lottery related to the instruction function. It is a restricted bonus that is restricted.

On the other hand, for overlapping hands with rare hands, the first BB is set so that there is no set difference in the winning probability, and the first BB triggered by this hand is a non-limiting bonus, and the second BB There is a set difference in the probability of winning, and the 2nd BB triggered by the winning combination is a restricted bonus.

As described above, in the limited bonus that has been shifted to the CZ mode, execution of the CZ mode continuation count addition process is permitted, but execution of the AT mode transition lottery and drop lottery is restricted. In other words, when a notice regarding the suitability of the AT mode is generated for the restricted bonus, the winning of the AT mode is a notice of the winning based on the number of CZ mode continuations. On the other hand, for non-restricted bonuses shifted to the CZ mode, execution of addition processing for the number of CZ mode continuations is permitted, and execution of the AT mode transition lottery and drop lottery is also permitted. In other words, when the AT mode win/loss notification is generated for non-restricted bonuses, in addition to the winning based on the number of CZ mode continuations, the winning based on the AT mode transition lottery and the non-winning based on the drop lottery are notified.

Comparing Special A duplicates 1 and 2, which are non-limiting bonuses, and Special AB duplications 1, 2, which are limited bonuses, the 10th replay is set in Special Ab duplications 1 and 2. It is different from Tokulip A duplication 1 and 2. As already explained, as the stop control of each game, when the replay and the bonus are repeatedly won, the replay is set to win with priority, and the replay is set so as not to miss the replay. A prize mode is set. Then, if the 9th replay win is established, it is not possible to determine whether it is a non-restricted bonus triggered by the special reply A duplication 1 and 2 or a restricted bonus triggered by the special reply AB duplication 1, It can be determined when the 10th re-game winning has been established.

Here, in the ninth replay and the tenth replay, although the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are common, the target symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red bell" symbol in the ninth replay. Alternatively, it is a "white bell" symbol, and in the tenth replay, a "young man" symbol is set. A total of six "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, while only one "youth" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L. Also, on the left reel 32L, the "young man" symbol is arranged at the 13th position, and the "white bell" symbol is arranged at the 12th position immediately below it and at the 15th position, which is two positions above it. Therefore, in a situation where both the ninth replay and the tenth replay are won, stop the target symbol of the tenth replay on the effective line of the left reel 32L so as to win the tenth replay. If so, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing when the 13th "young man" symbol reaches the activated line, and at other timings, that is, when the 14th "first replay" symbol to the 12th "white If the stopping operation is performed at the timing when the "Bell" symbol reaches the activated line, the target symbol of the ninth replay is stopped instead of the target symbol of the tenth replay.

Therefore, in the special reply AB overlap 1, 2 winning game, which is a duplicate role of the 9th replay and the 10th replay, basically the 9th replay win is established, and the 10th replay win is daringly aimed. Only when the stop operation is performed and the stop operation is successful, the tenth regame win is established. Then, the stop roll in the special reply A duplicate 1, 2 winning game and the stop roll in the special reply AB duplicate 1, 2 winning game are basically the same, and the bonus triggered by any winning combination. It is becoming difficult to determine whether In other words, it is difficult to determine whether it is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus from the stop roll in the winning game. It is possible to determine that it is a restricted bonus only when it is one that does.

And in this modification, when the 9th replay winning is established in the winning game of the 1st BB or 2nd BB limit non-target bonus triggered by the special reply A duplicate 1, 2 winning, that is, the winning game of the limit non-target bonus And, when the 9th replay winning is established in the winning game in the restricted bonus of the 1st BB or 2nd BB triggered by the special reply AB duplication 1, 2 winning, the CZ mode production during the bonus state is continued. Further, the AT mode winning notification effect is performed after the bonus state is ended. Therefore, whether or not an AT mode transition lottery or a CZ mode drop lottery is being performed during the bonus state can be determined from the CZ mode performance during the bonus state, the AT mode winning notification performance, etc. can't By doing so, it is possible to diversify the chances of winning the lottery for the transition to the AT mode, while intentionally making the chances of winning itself difficult to understand, so that the performance can be enjoyed until the end.

On the other hand, if the 10th replay win is established in the winning game in the limited bonus of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB triggered by the 1st and 2nd special replay AB duplicate winning, the bonus is a limited bonus. is determined. Therefore, in this case, the CZ mode performance during the bonus state is not performed, and the AT mode winning notification performance (first winning notification performance) based on the number of CZ mode continuations is generated when the bonus is won. By doing so, by performing a so-called pseudo effect as if the AT mode transition lottery is being performed during the bonus state, even though it is determined that the bonus is restricted. Distraction of the player can be avoided. Moreover, as described above, when the ninth replay and the tenth replay are duplicately won, a special stop operation is required in order to establish the tenth replay win, and considerable skill is required. It is considered that players with such skill often understand game specifications such as bonuses and AT mode winning opportunities. In other words, there is a high possibility that the pseudo production will be seen through. Therefore, as described above, when it is possible to succeed in establishing the 10th replay winning prize, by intentionally not performing a pseudo effect, the shyness when it is determined to be pseudo It is possible to preferably obtain the effect of a pseudo-representation by avoiding giving ugliness.

Furthermore, when the winning opportunity of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is a double role with a rare combination, as described above, the 1st BB is a non-restricted bonus, and the 2nd BB is a restricted bonus. The 1st BB or the 2nd BB can be easily discriminated by the difference in the winning mode, such as "red 7" pattern matching or "white BAR" pattern matching. That is, when a rare role winning is established in the winning game and the state shifts to the 1BB state, it is determined that the bonus is non-limiting, and after the rare role winning is established in the winning game, the state shifts to the 2BB state. When the bonus is transferred, it is determined that the bonus is restricted. On the other hand, it is possible that rare hands may be missed, and if there is a chance of failure in a winning game, it will be difficult to determine whether the first BB or the second BB has been won alone. In other words, in the event of a failure in the winning game and the transition to the 1 BB state, regardless of whether it is triggered by a duplicate role with a rare role or by a single winning, both are restricted. Although it is a non-targeted bonus, if there is a failure in the winning game and it shifts to the 2 BB state, a restricted bonus triggered by a duplicate role with a rare role or a non-restricted bonus triggered by a single winning cannot be determined.

Therefore, regarding the 1BB, if a rare role win is established in the winning game, if the 1BB win is established, or if a loss occurs, it is a non-limiting bonus, so it is for CZ mode The effect of is continued, and the AT mode winning notification is configured to be notified at the time of winning. By doing so, it is possible to fully enjoy thrilling game characteristics such as winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode while avoiding the falling lottery for the CZ mode in the non-restricted bonus.

With respect to the second BB, when a rare role winning is established in the winning game, it is determined that the bonus is restricted, so the effect for the CZ mode is discontinued, and the AT mode winning notification is given as a bonus. By setting it to the time of winning (preceding winning notification effect), it is possible to prevent the feeling of disappointment due to the pseudo effect being performed in a situation where it is determined to be pseudo. On the other hand, regarding the second BB, if there is a failure in the winning game, it is not possible to determine whether it is a single winning or a double winning with a rare role, and it is not possible to distinguish between a restricted bonus and a non-restricted bonus. . Therefore, the performance for the CZ mode is continued, and the success of the AT mode is notified at the end of the bonus, so that the performance effect using the pseudo performance can be favorably exhibited. As for the second BB, when the winning of the second BB is established in the winning game, it is determined that the bonus is non-limiting. In this case, the performance for the CZ mode is continued, and the notification of winning in the AT mode is configured to be notified when the game is won. By doing so, it is possible to fully enjoy the game property of winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode while avoiding the falling lottery of the CZ mode during the non-limiting bonus.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, processing is performed according to the limited number of times the AT mode shift lottery and the CZ mode drop lottery are performed. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing AT mode lottery processing in this embodiment. In addition, this embodiment is based on the first embodiment, and regardless of whether it is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus, during any bonus state (even during the bonus carryover state), the AT mode transition lottery and CZ mode The description will be based on the configuration in which the implementation of the falling lottery is restricted.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not the end CZ flag is set. If not set, the process advances to step S4102 to determine whether the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is in progress. If it is not in the bonus state or in the bonus carry-over state, the drop lottery for CZ mode and the transition lottery for AT mode in steps S4103 to S4108 are executed. The processes of steps S4103 to S4108 are the same as the processes of steps S3203 to S3208.

If it is determined in step S4102 that the player is in the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state, that is, if the CZ mode falling lottery or the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, the flow advances to step S4109. In step S4109, it is determined whether or not the falling lottery flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the drop lottery is limited because the drop lottery should be performed in terms of the number of continuations of the CZ mode, but the drop lottery is limited. If the falling lottery flag is set, it is determined in step S4110 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. If the fall lottery flag is set and the transition opportunity role is not won, in step S4112, addition processing of the fall lottery limit counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The drop lottery limit counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times the execution of the drop lottery in the CZ mode is restricted in the restricted state.

Even if the falling lottery flag is not set in step S4109, or even if the falling lottery flag is set in step S4110, if the game result of the current game is winning of the transition opportunity, further step After the fall lottery limit counter addition process is executed in S4111, the process proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, the AT mode lottery process is terminated after executing the addition process of the shift lottery limit counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The transition lottery limit counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in the restricted state.

That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times the CZ mode drop lottery and the AT mode transition lottery are restricted in the restricted state is individually stored.

If the end CZ flag is set in step S4101 and the CZ mode was set before the transition to the bonus, that is, if the CZ mode flag is set at the end of the bonus, the process proceeds to step S4113. In step S4113, the fall lottery is executed the number of times corresponding to the value of the fall lottery limit counter. In this case, the probability of winning the falling lottery (falling rate) may be the same as the winning probability of the falling lottery (step S4105) performed in each game, or may be different (lower) winning probability. .

More specifically, step S4113 determines whether or not the fall lottery limit counter is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, executes a fall lottery once and subtracts 1 from the fall lottery limit counter. Run. Then, if the fall lottery limit counter after subtraction is 1 or more, the fall lottery limit counter is less than 1 in such a way that one more fall lottery is executed and the fall lottery limit counter is decremented by 1. It is preferable to repeat the falling lottery until (0) is reached. Then, in step S4114, it is determined whether or not any of the drop lotteries executed in step S4113 has been won. If the drop winning is made, the process proceeds to step S4115. It should be noted that the process may proceed to step S4115 when one of the drop lotteries in step S4113 is won. In step S4115, a process of setting a fallen flag is executed. In other words, the same process as the fall lottery process (steps S4105 to S4107) executed in each game is executed. After executing the process of step S4115, the AT mode lottery process ends.

If it is determined in step S4114 that the falling prize has not been won, the process proceeds to step S4116. In step S4116, the transition lottery is executed the number of times corresponding to the value of the transition lottery limit counter. In this case, the transition lottery winning probability (fall rate) may be the same as the winning probability of the transition lottery (step S4108) performed in each game, or may be different (higher) winning probability. .

In more detail about step S4116, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery limit counter is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, one transition lottery is executed and 1 is subtracted from the transition lottery limit counter. Run. Then, if the transition lottery limit counter after the subtraction is 1 or more, the transition lottery limit counter is less than 1, in such a way that one more transition lottery is executed and the process of subtracting 1 from the transition lottery limit counter is executed. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the transition lottery is repeated until (0) is reached. Then, in step S4117, it is determined whether or not any of the transition lotteries executed in step S4116 has been won. When winning, the process advances to step S4118. It should be noted that the process may proceed to step S4118 at the time when any transition lottery in step S4116 is won. In step S4118, the CZ mode flag is cleared. Then, in step S4119, an AT mode winning flag is set, and in step S4120, after outputting a portent command to set the number of games in the portent mode to 0, the AT mode lottery process is terminated. The processes of steps S4118 to S4120 are the same as the processes of steps S3210 to S3212.

If it is determined in step S4117 that the AT mode has not been won, the process advances to step S4121 to determine whether or not the number of continuations of the CZ mode is 29 or more. If the number is 29 or more, the process proceeds to step S4118 for AT mode winning, and if the number is less than 29, the process proceeds to step S4102 for normal use.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while using a configuration in which the count itself of the number of continuations of the CZ mode is not limited in the restricted state, the AT mode transition lottery and the drop lottery for the CZ mode, which are subject to the restriction, According to the number of times that the restriction is applied (limit number of times), it is configured to collectively perform later. Even with such a configuration, by allowing the counting of the number of continuations of the CZ mode in the restricted state, the playability when the restricted state occurs during the CZ mode is secured, and the transition lottery or the like is performed in the restricted state. It is possible not to contradict the significance of restricting the fall lottery.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the drop lottery is performed the number of times corresponding to the value of the fall lottery limit counter, and the transition lottery is performed the number of times corresponding to the value of the transition lottery limit counter. In the example, the fall lottery and transition lottery are performed with probabilities corresponding to the values of each counter. FIG. 104(a) shows drop winning rates according to the value of the drop lottery limit counter, and FIG. 104(b) shows transition winning rates according to the value of the shift lottery limit counter.

More specifically, in FIG. 104(a), the winning probability of the drop lottery is set so that the winning probability differs depending on the value of the drop lottery limit counter. If it is 2-3, you will be elected with 5%, if it is 4-8, you will be elected with 1%, if it is 9-15, you will be elected with 0.1%, and if it is 16 or more In the case of , an example of winning at 0% is shown. That is, it is set so that the drop lottery limit counter value is larger (the number of times the drop lottery is restricted is greater), the drop winning rate is lower.

Also, in FIG. 104(b), the winning probability of the transition lottery is set so that the winning probability differs according to the value of the transition lottery limit counter. Winning with a winning probability (FIG. 38) according to the game result, if the number is 2 to 3, the winning probability is 3%, if the number is 4 to 8, the winning probability is 10%, and if the number is 9 to 15, the winning probability is 3%. shows an example of winning with 20%, and winning with 50% if the number is 16 or more. That is, the higher the value of the transition lottery limit counter (the more times the transition lottery is limited), the higher the transition winning rate.

By doing so, the fall lottery and the transition lottery are not repeatedly executed, so that the processing load can be greatly reduced, and the player's opportunity loss due to being restricted in the restricted state can be reduced to It is possible to suitably compensate for this by post-facto fall lottery and transition lottery.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, a privilege is given to the player according to the values of the drop lottery limit counter and the shift lottery limit counter. As an example of the privilege, a setting suggesting effect that can present information that can be beneficial to the player will be described. FIG. 104(c) shows the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect A according to the value of the falling lottery limit counter, and FIG. 104(d) shows the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect B according to the value of the shift lottery limit counter. rate. The setting suggesting effect A and the setting suggesting effect B have different effect contents, and more specifically, they are effects suggesting different set values. For example, the setting suggestion effect A suggests that the setting value is an even number setting (2, 4, 6) or an odd number setting (1, 3, 5), and the setting suggestion effect B indicates that the setting value is It suggests that it is less than the predetermined value (4) or greater than or equal to the predetermined value.

In FIG. 104(c), the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effect A is set so as to have a different occurrence rate depending on the value of the drop lottery limit counter. When it is 1 to 3, it occurs in 5%, when it is 4 to 8, it occurs in 1%, when it is 9 to 15, it occurs in 0.1%, and when it is 16 or more shows an example that occurs at 0%. That is, the setting suggestion effect A is set to occur at a lower rate as the fall lottery limit counter value increases (the number of times the fall lottery is limited increases).

In addition, in FIG. 104(d), the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect B is set so as to have a different occurrence rate depending on the value of the shift lottery limit counter. If it is 1 to 3, it occurs in 3%, if it is 4 to 8, it occurs in 10%, if it is 9 to 15, it occurs in 20%, and if it is 16 or more shows an example that occurs at 50%. That is, the larger the value of the shift lottery limit counter (the more times the shift lottery is limited), the higher the occurrence rate of setting suggestion effect B.

In this way, the player's opportunity loss due to being restricted in the restricted state can be suitably compensated for by presenting information that can be beneficial to the player, such as a setting suggestion effect.

Although the number of times the falling lottery is restricted and the number of times the transition lottery is restricted can basically be the same number, in the setting suggestion performance A, the higher the number of times, the lower the occurrence rate, and the setting suggestion performance B. is set so that the higher the number of occurrences, the higher the occurrence rate. For this reason, a player who desires the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect A desires a short restricted state, and a player who desires the occurrence of the setting suggestion performance B desires a long restricted state. can be used to capture the length of On top of that, it is premised that the longer the restricted state, the higher the possibility of winning AT mode, so basically, while expecting the longer side, we suggest setting it as a compensation if it is not (if it is short). You can expect performance A. By doing so, it is possible to greatly improve the playability in the restricted state.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the configurations of the AT mode shift lottery during the CZ mode and the drop lottery in the CZ mode are made different. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, an AT mode transition lottery is performed according to the lottery result of each game in the CZ mode, and when the number of continuous CZ modes reaches 30, the AT mode transition lottery is won. After the number of continuations of the CZ mode is 20 or later, a falling lottery is performed. In this modified example, this is changed, and a map table is provided in the ROM 105 in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery and the winning probability of the falling lottery of the CZ mode are set for the number of continuations in the CZ mode. An AT mode transition lottery and a CZ mode drop lottery are performed based on the winning probability set in the map table. Also, a plurality of map tables are provided, and when shifting to the CZ mode, a map table is selected according to the game result that triggered the winning of the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode, for example, in the first special winning process.

FIG. 105 shows an example of the map table. In the map table, the AT mode shift winning rate and the CZ mode falling winning rate are set for each game according to the number of CZ mode continuations. For example, in the map table 1, the AT mode transition winning rate is set to 5% for each CZ mode continuation number 1 to 29, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed with a winning probability of 5% in each game. It is shown that. Also, in map table 1, when the number of CZ mode continuations is 30, the AT mode transition winning rate is 100%. has also been realized.

Furthermore, in the map table 1, the CZ mode fall winning rate is set as 0% when the number of CZ mode continuations is 1 to 19, and the CZ mode fall lottery is performed with a winning probability of 0% for each game up to the 19th game. This indicates that the player will not fall until the 19th game. When the number of CZ mode continuations is 20 to 30, the falling winning rate is set to 50%, and from the 20th game onwards, the falling lottery is performed with a winning probability of 50% every game.

In the map table 2, the AT mode transition winning rate set at CZ mode continuation numbers 1 to 29 is higher than that in the above map table 1, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed with a winning probability of 10% in each game. It is set as a map table that is more advantageous to the player than the map table 1 in terms of the points.

In the map table 3, the CZ mode falling winning rate is set as 0% for the number of CZ mode continuations of 1 to 24, and the falling winning rate for 25 to 30 is set as 50%. That is, the map table 3 is set as a map table more advantageous for the player than the map table 1 or the map table 2 up to the 19th game in that the player does not fall down until the 24th game. For example, if the trigger role that triggered the transition to the CZ mode is strong cherry, map table 1 is likely to be selected, if it is weak cherry, map table 2 is likely to be selected, and if it is strong watermelon or weak watermelon, map table 1 is likely to be selected. It is preferable that different map tables are selected according to the trigger, such as 3 being more likely to be selected.

In the map table 4, the AT mode transition winning rate and the CZ mode falling winning rate are set to 0% for any of the CZ mode continuation numbers from 1 to 30, and the AT mode transition regardless of the CZ mode continuation number. It is a map table that neither wins the lottery nor wins the falling lottery. The map table 4 corresponds to the restricted state. When the restricted state occurs, for example, when a bonus win is won during the CZ mode, the map table 4 is displayed instead of the previous map table in the AT mode lottery process, for example. , the map table 4 may be used to perform an AT mode transition lottery or a fall lottery for each game.

Even in the configuration using such a map table, when the number of continuations of the CZ mode reaches 30 corresponding to the ceiling, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and after the number of continuations of the CZ mode is 20 or more, the falling lottery is performed. Furthermore, by utilizing the fact that the addition processing of the number of continuations of the CZ mode is allowed even during the restricted state, it is possible to realize the game property of approaching the ceiling by the number of games during the restricted state. .

Further, by using such a map table, it is possible to simplify the processing in the configuration in which the lottery corresponding to the limit of the transition lottery and the fall lottery is performed after the fact. In other words, if it is applied to the first and second embodiments, it is sufficient to return the map table to the previous map table when returning from the restricted state, and if it is applied to the third embodiment, , the number of CZ mode continuations for which a transition lottery or a fall lottery is performed is temporarily stored as, for example, 3 games to 13 games, by referring to the map table 4, which is the amount for which the transition lottery or the fall lottery is limited. Then, when a post-facto lottery is performed, a transfer lottery or a drop lottery corresponding to the number of continuations temporarily stored is performed again in the original map table (for example, map table 1). In this way, by making the odds of winning the shift lottery and the fall lottery different in each game in the CZ mode, it is possible to easily perform the lottery afterwards while diversifying the games.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) In each of the above inventions, a configuration in which the transition to the AT mode occurs depending on the number of games in the CZ mode, and a configuration in which only the number of games in the CZ mode is counted during the bonus carryover state, etc. is used. The transition that occurs depending on the number of games is not limited to the AT mode, and may be the VB mode, the specialized zone, or other modes. In addition, instead of causing the transition of the display mode, it is sufficient that the player is given a privilege. may

(2) By changing the lottery table during the bonus carry-over state, the stop control mode (such as the number of sliding frames), and the priority order in the case of duplicate winning, the bonus winning rate during the bonus carry-over state is varied. good too. For example, it may be configured to shift to an RT state in which a predetermined replay probability increases when shifting to a bonus carryover state, and to make it difficult to establish a bonus prize by giving priority to replay prizes over bonus prizes. A configuration may be adopted in which the lottery table is changed to a lottery table in which the probability of the payout result of 1 is increased, and the bonus winning is less likely to be established by giving priority to the payout result winning over the bonus winning. In addition, in the bonus carry-over state, the number of reel control slips may be reduced, so that even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the bonus winning, it may be difficult to align (difficult to slip).

(3) During the bonus carry-over state, a re-game result or a payout result that has a higher winning probability than before the carry-over is provided, and the easiness of establishing a bonus prize is different, and these re-game results or payout results are won. The probability may vary depending on the set value. By doing so, the winning rate during the bonus carry-over state changes depending on the set value, and the AT mode winning rate when the bonus is won during the CZ mode can vary depending on the set value.

(4) In each embodiment, when the number of continuous CZ modes reaches the ceiling of 30 games or more, the AT mode winning is determined. In other words, during the CZ mode, the AT In addition to performing a mode transition lottery, an AT mode transition lottery is also performed based on the number of CZ mode continuations. It can be said that this is a configuration in which the AT mode is won with a probability of 100%. In this case, regarding the AT mode transition lottery based on the number of consecutive CZ modes, it is not necessary to win the AT mode with a 100% probability if the number of games played is 30 or more. may Also, the number of games that make it easier to win is not limited to 30 games, and may be 20 games or 40 games.

(5) Although the normal mode is changed to the CZ mode and then the CZ mode to the AT mode, the normal mode may be changed to the AT mode as well as the CZ mode. That is, the transition route to the AT mode (lottery trigger) may be set not only via the CZ mode but also another transition route.

(6) The bonus state based on the 1st BB and the 2nd BB basically continues for about 30 games, but it may be continued for 20 games, which is less than the CZ mode ceiling (30 games). Alternatively, 40 games may be continued as the number of games, which is larger than the ceiling.

As for the bonus state based on RB, it is assumed that about 10 games are continued, but it may be 5 games or 15 games. In addition, in relation to the 10 games (20th to 30th games) in which the fall lottery is performed, in order to avoid the fall lottery based on the RB prize, the number of games (10 games) in which the fall lottery is performed It is preferable that the above number of games can be continued.

(8) Although a common lottery table is used for the bonus state based on the 1st BB or the 2nd BB and the bonus state based on the RB, separate lottery tables may be used.

(9) Separate lottery tables may be set for restricted bonuses and non-restricted bonuses. In this case, with the restricted bonus, as many games as possible can be continued in order to earn the number of games up to the ceiling of the CZ mode, and with the non-restricted bonus, a smaller number of games can be continued.

(10) When the bonus and the CZ mode are won at the same time, the number of precursor games may be varied depending on the type of bonus (limited bonus or non-limited bonus) and the number of continuous bonus games.

(11) The number of continuations in the CZ mode may be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. In this case, the number of games may be counted up from the start of the CZ mode, or the number of games up to the ceiling (30) may be counted down.

(12) Concerning the drop lottery, the configuration is such that the drop lottery is not performed when the transition trigger role is won, but the configuration may be such that the drop lottery is not performed even when the strong cherry 2 or the like whose winning probability differs depending on the set value is won. In this case, it is preferable that neither the falling lottery nor the AT mode shift lottery is performed when the strong cherry 2 is won.

(13) In the game, if the fall lottery is won, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed. may be configured to allow transition to the AT mode.

(14) As a winning notification effect when RB wins in CZ mode, if RB and AT mode are simultaneously won, regardless of the number of continuations of CZ mode, AT mode first winning notification effect is generated. Although it is configured, this configuration may be applied to notification of the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. For example, if the number of continuations for which AT mode winning is confirmed in CZ mode is made longer than the above, or if the number of continuations of the bonus state based on the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is made shorter than the above, during CZ mode The winning of AT mode may not be determined depending on the winning timing of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and there may be a case where the first winning notification performance of the AT mode is not generated at the time of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning notification performance. In this case, if the first BB or second BB and the AT mode are simultaneously won, if the AT mode first winning notification effect is generated, the timing of winning the AT mode can be further complicated, It is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of AT mode winning and help heighten the excitement at the time of notification.

(15) The AT mode first winning notification effect may be applied to the following configuration. In the normal mode, when the 1BB or 2BB is elected, it is possible to win simultaneously with the CZ mode, and when the 1BB or 2BB in the normal mode and the CZ mode are elected at the same time, the 1BB or 2BB As a prize winning notification performance, an AT mode first prize winning notification performance is generated. Even with such a configuration, the simultaneously won CZ mode will reach 30 games during the bonus state based on the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the transfer to the AT mode will be confirmed, so the AT mode will be won first. Even if the notification performance is generated, there is no discrepancy with subsequent game contents.

(16) As a configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery based on the number of CZ mode continuations is performed and then the CZ mode drop lottery is performed, the first game after the bonus has been described in particular, but the bonus transition game for non-limiting and transition It may be applied to the last game. In addition, although the AT mode transition lottery based on the number of CZ mode continuations is performed, and then the CZ mode drop lottery is performed, the order may be reversed, or they may be performed at the same time.

(17) Advantageous intervals may be defined as follows. A section in which at least one pushing order notification corresponding to the winning of the maximum number of payouts occurs. More specifically, in a push-order bell that can pay out 9, 3, or 0 medals depending on the stop order, the push-order notification that 9 medals will be paid out is generated at least once. interval.

(18) In order to prevent differences in the probabilities and advantages of the AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery depending on the setting values, the lottery is performed based on the lottery results with no particular setting difference. A lottery may be drawn based on a certain lottery result, but setting differences may be prevented by adjusting the benefits at the time of winning (the winning probability of a privilege, transition lottery, etc., and the number of additional games). For example, with setting 1, you will win with a probability of 1/100, and with setting 6, you will have a special role that you will win with a probability of 1/10. At setting 6, it is 1/20. By doing so, the total added winning probability becomes 1/200 regardless of the setting value, and the setting difference is eliminated.

(19) Although the game in which the number of bets is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game in which the number of bets is 1 or a 2-bet game in which the number of bets is 2. For example, depending on whether the fixed RT state or the infinite RT state, a 1-bet game or a 2-bet game can be used (playable), but other bet numbers cannot be used (playable).

(20) The number of forcibly ended games in the advantageous section is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be more or less.

(21) The conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section may include not only the completion of the upper limit number of games (1500), but also the upper limit number of payout medals (3000) in addition to or instead of that.

(22) The add-on lottery table and the add-on game count lottery table are not limited to those described above, and the winning probability, the range and average of the add-on game number at the time of winning, etc. are arbitrary. For example, the number of games (eg, 2000 games) exceeding the upper limit number of the advantageous section may be selected as the number of additional games.

(23) Although the VB mode as a pseudo-bonus has been configured to be transitionable only during the AT mode, it may be configured to be transitionable even during the normal mode. In this case, when a lottery for switching to the VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the start game, and the display of the section indicator is started before the operation of the game following the start game is permitted. And it is sufficient. Also, in this case, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won at the same time as the VB mode, the starting game should be the game in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won.

(24) Small wins with medal payouts such as high cherry, low cherry, high watermelon, low watermelon, etc., and prizes with these high cherries, etc. Although specific replays having a common mode, and overlapping combinations of these small wins and specific replays and bonuses have been described as examples, the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined bonus is performed alone, or a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed even in normal replays. Alternatively, a transition lottery or the like may be performed based on the number of games played or the cumulative number of points separately awarded based on each result. In any case, it is sufficient that the timing of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section or the like does not cause a difference in the probability of winning or the frequency of occurrence depending on the set value.

(25) Regarding the advantageous section, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the benefits at the time of winning (transition mode, number of additional games, etc.) are common regardless of the setting value, but the winning probability etc. are different depending on the setting value. good too. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers a lottery such as a transfer lottery, there are cases where there is a difference in the set value probabilities and prizes at the time of winning, and there are cases where there is no difference in the probability and prizes at the time of winning due to the set values. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(26) The number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is managed by the number of games AG in the advantageous interval. (until three replays are won in a row) may be set as one set, and the number of sets may be used for management. Specifically, in the AT mode, a predetermined number of games (50 games) is set as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the time of starting the AT mode or at the time of AT mode transition lottery. Then, the AT mode is terminated when the determined number of sets is consumed. In this case, when specific conditions such as winning a special role are established during AT mode, etc., an additional lottery for the number of sets will be performed as an additional lottery for AT mode. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the number of sets is added.

(27) When the push order bell or push order replay is won, the winning combination differs depending on the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Although the advantage for the player is made different depending on whether or not the stop operation is performed, any combination may be used as long as the advantage for the player is different by notifying the user of the stop operation.

For example, on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first pattern (for example, "black BAR" pattern) and the second pattern (for example, "red 7" pattern) cannot be aimed at the same time (at a position separated by five symbols or more). )Deploy. Then, the first symbol on the left reel 32L, the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (eg, "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol), and the predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (eg, "first replay" symbol or "Second replay" symbol) and stop on the activated line, the first result winning is established, and the second symbol on the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, "first replay" symbol or " 2nd replay symbol) and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (e.g., 1st replay symbol or 2nd replay symbol) stop on the activated line, so that the second result winning is established. A prize mode is set for the first result and the second result. In this case, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the first symbol when the first result is won, the first result prize can be established, but if the stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol instead of the first symbol, the first result prize will not be awarded. It will not work and no corresponding benefits will be granted. Similarly, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol when the second result is won, the second result winning can be established, but if the stop operation is performed aiming at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result winning is not possible. It will not work and no corresponding benefits will be granted. On top of that, a special role is provided in which either the first result or the second result will be won, and when the special role is won, which one of the first result or the second result is won (first symbol and second result) Which of the two symbols should be targeted for the stop operation of the left reel 32L?). Also in such a configuration, it is possible to win the winning result (either the first result or the second result) by the notification, and the degree of advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. At least one of a mode in which such notification is likely to be performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to the mode in which the notification is likely to be performed is high, and a mode in which those who have won the lottery for transition to these modes are before transition. The advantageous interval may be a situation including the mode, or the advantageous interval may be a situation including at least one of the above modes, including each of the above modes and each mode based on the pushing order.

In other words, the stopping operation for differentiating the winning combination is not limited to the stopping order, and may be any stopping operation mode including the timing of the stopping operation. is not limited to notification of the pressing order, and may be notification of a mode related to an operation mode.

In addition, a plurality of winning combinations are set in the case of winning with a predetermined index value IV, and the winning combinations are differentiated according to the stop operation mode such as stop order and stop operation timing. You may do so. That is, when winning with a specific index value IV, it is assumed that the specific combination has been won, and the stop operation mode corresponding to the specific combination is determined by lottery after that, and the player's stop operation mode is determined by the stop operation. If it matches the lottery result of the mode, the special role winning is established, and if the stop operation mode of the player does not match the lottery result of the stop operation mode, the special role winning is not established, or The lottery for the game result and the lottery for the stop operation mode may be separate lotteries (two-step lottery), such as establishing different wins.

(28) A configuration may be adopted in which the pressing order notification is performed also in the CZ mode and the portent mode. More specifically, including AT mode, CZ mode, portent mode, etc., when the transition to the specific game state is also performed as an advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is until the press order notification occurs at least a predetermined number of times (once). A configuration that does not end may be adopted.

(29) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(30) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(31) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a first specific process executing means (function for executing processes such as step S3104 by the main controller 101) capable of executing a first specific process for counting the number of games executed in a predetermined specific state (CZ mode);
grasping means capable of grasping that the result of the first specifying process performed by the first specifying process executing means is a specified result that the number of games executed in the specified state is a predetermined specific number; (Function to execute processing such as step S3107 by main controller 101);
privilege granting means (function of executing processing such as step S3110 by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the identification result is grasped by the grasping means;
In the game executed in the specific state, a second specific process executing means (the process of step S3205 by the main controller 101) capable of executing the second specific process as a lottery process for determining whether or not to end the specific state functions to perform) and
Based on the fact that the game result of the game executed in the specific state is a transition result (bonus winning) that enables transition to a predetermined transition state, at least in the game until transition to the transition state , special means (step S3202 by main controller 101, etc.) for permitting execution of the first specific process by the first specific process execution means, while restricting execution of the second specific process by the second specific process execution means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

According to the above configuration, in a specific state in which a privilege is granted based on the number of games played reaching a specific number, the end lottery is performed in each game, and the end lottery is not won. Assuming the playability of hoping to reach the number, if the result of the game in that specific state is a transition result that enables transition to the transition state, at least in the game until the transition to the transition state occurs, While the count of the number of games in the specific state is continued, execution of the end lottery is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to expect a transition result in the game property of avoiding the ending lottery winning in the specific state. In addition, since the end lottery is limited and the number of games is allowed to be counted at least until the transition to the transition state, even if the transition to the transition state is delayed, the end lottery can be avoided and the number of games until the privilege is granted can be reduced. it is possible to earn Therefore, the playability in the specific state is dramatically enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased.

Feature A2. The special means permits the execution of the first specific process by the first specific process executing means even in each game in the transition state, while restricting the execution of the second specific process by the second specific process executing means. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the above configuration, even during the transition state, it is possible to earn the number of games until the privilege is given while avoiding the ending lottery. By doing so, the advantage of winning as a transition result during the specific state is increased, and the expectation for winning as a result of the transition can be preferably increased.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the number of games executed in the transition state can be equal to or greater than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the transition state, the number of games counted by the first specific process executing means becomes equal to or greater than the specific number, and it is determined that the privilege is granted. Therefore, regardless of the number of games required from winning the transition result to transitioning to the transition state, awarding of the privilege can be confirmed, and the transition to the transition state can be promptly performed.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the number of games executed in the transition state can be less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, even if the state is shifted to the transition state, the number of games counted by the first specific process executing means is not determined to be equal to or greater than the specific number, and it is necessary to transition to the transition state after winning the transition result. Benefits are given according to the number of games played. In this way, when winning as a transition result during the specific state, how to prevent the transition to the transition state and earn the number of games until the award of the privilege is realized, and the interest in the specific state is realized. is dramatically increased.

Feature A5. As the transition result, a special transition result (first BB, second BB) that allows transition to a special transition state (BB state), and a predetermined transition that allows transition to a predetermined transition state (RB state) different from the special transition state. having a result (RB) and
the number of games to be executed in the special transition state can be equal to or greater than the specific number;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the number of games executed in the predetermined transition state can be less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the special transition state based on the special transition result, it is determined that the number of games counted by the first specific process execution means is equal to or greater than the specific number, and that the privilege is granted. On the other hand, even if the state is shifted to the predetermined transition state based on the predetermined transition result, it is not confirmed that the number of games counted by the first specific processing execution means is equal to or greater than the specific number. Benefits are given according to the number of games required to transition to the transition state. By doing so, different game characteristics are realized according to the type of the transition result, and along with the expectation of winning the transition result during the specific state, the interest in the type is increased, and the interest in the specific state is improved. It is possible to plan

Feature A6. As the transition result, the first transition result (for example, special rep A duplication 1, 2 as a non-restricted bonus) and a second transition result different from the first transition result (for example, special rep AB as a restricted bonus overlaps 1, 2) and
The special means is
In each game in the transition state shifted based on the first transition result, the first specific process executing means executes the first specific process, and the second specific process executing means executes the second specific process. allow
In each game in the transition state shifted based on the second transition result, execution of the first specific process by the first specific process executing means is permitted, while the second specific process by the second specific process executing means is permitted. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein execution of processing is restricted.

According to the above configuration, whether or not it is possible to earn the number of games until awarding of the privilege while avoiding the end lottery even during the transition state differs depending on the type of the transition result. In other words, if it is the first transition result, the end lottery is unavoidable during the transition state, so how to postpone the transition to the transition state is the key to the game, and if the second transition result is the transition state. Since it is possible to earn the number of games until the award of the privilege while avoiding the end lottery, for example, if the number of games in the transition state is taken into account, it is possible to realize a game feature such as the award of the privilege being fixed when the second transition result is won. be. By doing so, depending on which transition result is won during the specific state, not only the advantage is improved, but also the game characteristics are greatly different, and the expectation for the transition result to be won is preferably increased. be able to.

Feature A7. In each game in the transition state based on the first transition result, a grant lottery capable of executing a grant lottery to determine whether the privilege by the privilege granting means or a second privilege different from the privilege is granted to the player. Means (function for executing AT mode lottery processing by main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the granting lottery means is a result corresponding to granting the second privilege to the player, a second privilege granting means (main controller) capable of granting the second privilege to the player 101 to set the AT mode winning flag);
with
The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein in each game in the transition state based on the second transition result, execution of the grant lottery by the grant lottery means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, in the transition state based on the first transition result, although the end lottery can be executed, the grant lottery for granting the second privilege can also be executed. On the other hand, in the transition state based on the second transition result, the end lottery is not executed, but the grant lottery is not executed either. By doing this, when the first transition result is reached, even after transitioning to the transition state, it is expected that the specific number will be reached while bypassing the end lottery, and that the grant lottery will be won on the way, and the second transition result will be obtained. , After the transition state transition, the transition state is continued as much as possible to reach a specific number. This will make the game more interesting during the specific state.

Feature A8. The number of games that can be executed during the transition state based on the first transition result and the transition state based on the second transition result are the same or substantially the same, or The gaming machine according to feature A7.

According to the above configuration, depending on the type of transition result, the execution of the end lottery during the transition state may not be restricted. to some extent. Then, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not execution of the end lottery is restricted from the number of games that can be executed during the transition state. In this way, by making it difficult to distinguish between the transition states based on both transition results, did the final lottery evade the specific number, or did the execution of the final lottery be restricted in the first place and the specific number was reached? becomes difficult to understand, and by playing the game while predicting that before reaching a specific number, a game property that gives a strong thrilling feeling is realized.

Note that "the number of games is the same or substantially the same" may be expressed as "the number of games is about the same". In addition, "the number of games is the same or almost the same" includes not only "the number of games is completely the same" but also "the number of games is different", and the degree of difference is different for the player. It is acceptable as long as there is no difference in the degree of advantage.

Feature A9. Transition notification means (function for executing lottery result correspondence processing by main controller 101) capable of executing transition notification (stop results of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, etc.) of transition to the transition state,
The mode of the transition notification by the transition notification means is common between the transition to the transition state based on the first transition result and the transition to the transition state based on the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is difficult to determine from the transition notification whether the transition state is based on the first transition result or the transition state based on the second transition result. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game of predicting whether the specified number has been reached by evading the ending lottery or whether the specified number has been reached due to the restriction of execution of the ending lottery in the first place increases.

Feature A10. The grasping means performs the first specifying process before the second specifying process is performed by the second specifying process executing means in the game that transitioned to the transition state or in the first game after the end of the transition state. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein it is determined whether or not the result of is the specified result.

According to the above configuration, it is confirmed that the number of games in the specific state has reached the specific number before the game in which the transition state is entered or the lottery for determining whether the specific state is to end in the first game after the end of the transition state. Grasping is done. By doing this, even though you have reached a certain number in the transition state, the end lottery will end before it is grasped (before the privilege is granted). Absurdity can be avoided.

Feature A11. When the transition result is a specific transition result, the transition to the transition state occurs based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition (stop roll),
In a game in which the transition condition is not satisfied even if the result of the specific transition is obtained, the transition to the transition state does not occur, and the result of the specific transition is carried over to the next game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10.

According to the above configuration, in the game from when the specific transition result is obtained until when the transition condition is established and the transition to the transition state occurs, the number of games in the specific state is counted (first specific process). , Since the execution of the end lottery (second specific process) to end the specific state is restricted, how to prevent the transition to the transition state after the specific transition result is the key to approaching the granting of benefits. . By doing so, it is possible to provide novel game characteristics such as playing the game while hoping that the transition condition will not be satisfied after the specific transition result is obtained.

Feature A12. The special means permits the execution of the first specific process by the first specific process executing means even in each game in the transition state, while restricting the execution of the second specific process by the second specific process executing means. it is possible to
A notification means (function for executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification that the result of the game is the specific transition result,
Based on the current result of the first specific process by the first specific process executing means, the notifying means is configured to perform the first specific process by the first specific process executing means when the transition state based on the specific transition result is performed. 1. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that, when the result of the 1 specific process does not become the specific result, it is possible to execute an instruction notification instructing not to satisfy the transition condition.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games in the specific state does not reach the specific number during the transition state based on the winning of the specific transition result, the specific condition is not established, and the number of games until transition to the transition state. can be made to earn By doing so, it becomes easier to give a privilege based on the transition to the transition state.

It should be noted that the active participation of the player is encouraged in the above-described configuration by setting the transition condition so that success or failure is determined based on the player's operation or with the involvement of the player's operation.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, wherein the specific transition result includes a plurality of results with different easiness of establishment of the transition condition.

According to the above configuration, the number of games required to transition to the transition state may differ depending on how easily the transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, the easiness of earning the number of games required until the privilege is granted is different, and novel game characteristics are realized such that the game is played while hoping for a specific transition result in which the transition condition is difficult to be satisfied.

Feature A14. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for each game based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state are provided,
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the first specific game state in the normal game state (function for executing AT mode lottery processing by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the first specific game state (corresponding to the winning result by the main controller 101 function to perform processing) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is an advantageous result (first BB, second BB, RB) for shifting to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, it is possible to shift the game state to the advantageous state. Transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101);
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the advantageous result, a reservation means (a function of executing a process of setting the carry-over state by the main controller 101) capable of withholding the advantageous result until the transition to the advantageous state;
with
As a game state, a second specific game state (CZ mode) is provided in which the probability of said transition lottery by said transition lottery means is higher than said normal game state,
The specific state is the second specific game state,
The privilege granted by the privilege granting means is the first specific game state transferred by the specific transition means,
the transitional state is the advantageous state;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the transition result is the advantageous result.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a payout means pays out a predetermined number of game media if the number corresponds to the result of the lottery, a case where a first result winning is realized and a second result is realized by a stop operation mode of the stop operation means. As a result, winning may be established, and the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the presence or absence of mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Furthermore, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes an advantageous result, the player may shift to an advantageous state, and the interlocking of the transition to the advantageous state and the state notification allows the acquisition of a large amount of game media. is realized.

On the premise of such playability, a second specific game state is provided in which a transition to the first specific game state in which the execution frequency of mode notification is likely to occur is further provided, and the game in the second specific game state is provided. When the number reaches a specific number, a transition to the first specific game state occurs. Also, the second specific game state is a configuration in which an end lottery called a second specific process is performed. If an advantageous result is obtained during the second specific game state, the number of games in the second specific game state is allowed to be counted in the game until the transition to the advantageous state, but the ending lottery by the second specific process is restricted. , it is possible to earn the number of games until the transition to the first specific game state occurs. Therefore, the playability during the second specific game state is dramatically enhanced, and the degree of attention of the game can be favorably increased.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for each game based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101) capable of executing payout of game media in a number corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (advantageous section) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state are provided,
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery to the specific game state in the normal game state (function for executing AT mode lottery processing by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result (first BB, second BB, RB) that shifts to a payout state in which the probability of achieving a predetermined payout result for which game media are to be paid out by the payout means is high. payout transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of shifting the game state to the payout state;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transition result, a retaining means capable of withholding the transition result until the transition to the payout state (a function of executing a process of setting the carryover state by the main controller 101);
When the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the payout state reaches a predetermined specific number, payout end means for ending the payout state (execution of end determination processing by main controller 101) function) and
Limiting means for limiting execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means during the payout state (function for executing processing such as step S3202 by the main controller 101);
A specific means (a function of executing a process of winning an AT mode based on the number of CZ mode continuations by the main control device 101) that makes it easier to shift to the specific game state as the number of executed games in the payout state increases;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a payout means pays out a predetermined number of game media if the number corresponds to the result of the lottery, a case where a first result winning is realized and a second result is realized by a stop operation mode of the stop operation means. As a result, winning may be established, and the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the presence or absence of mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Further, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the transition result, there may be a transition to a payout state in which the probability of achieving a predetermined payout result for which game media are to be paid out by the payout means is high. By interlocking, a game property that can be expected to acquire a large amount of game media is realized.

On the premise of such playability, in the payout state, the payout state is terminated when the number of payouts of game media reaches a specific number, and the advantage of the payout state is set so as not to become too high. It is In addition, regarding the lottery for transition to the specific game state related to the state notification, it is configured to restrict the execution during the payout state, and while allowing the interlocking of the game property by the state notification and the game property by the payout means, Measures have been taken to prevent the rate from rising.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts reaches the specified number, the payout state ends. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to reach the specified number with as few game media as possible, which is used in each game. If the number of game media and the number of payouts to be paid out are constant, the smaller the number of games executed during the payout state, the better for the player. In addition, in the payout state, the number of games executed in the payout state is small, which is preferable for the player from the viewpoint that the lottery for transition to the specific game state is restricted. However, if such a configuration is adopted, the player will want the payout state to be shifted to a shorter period.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the number of payouts reaches a specific number as described above as the trigger for ending the payout state, but the greater the number of games executed in the payout state, the easier it is to shift to the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation that the payout state will continue for a long time in relation to the specific game state, and to suitably enhance the game during the payout state.

Feature B2. In the payout means, the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result (the first combination and the first minor combination in BB/RB), and the combination of symbols for payout corresponding to the payout result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, it is possible to execute the payout of game media in a number corresponding to the payout result,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a specific result different from the payout result (BB/RB 2nd win, BB/RB 3rd win, 2nd to 26th minor wins) is provided,
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result, and the specified combination of symbols corresponding to the specified specified result has stopped at the valid position, the payout means selects the number corresponding to the specified result. and a smaller number of game media are paid out than in the case of the payout result, or even if the specified picture combination corresponding to the specified specified result stops at the effective position, the game media are not paid out. It is a configuration that does not perform or is not subject to payment,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein in the payout state, the lottery result by the lottery means can be the payout result and the specified result.

According to the above configuration, if a specific result is obtained in the payout state, the number of game media paid out is less than the payout result, or no payout is performed. Become. In other words, the number of games required to reach the specific number increases by the number of specific results. In this case, the number of games in which the execution of the lottery to transition to the specific game state is restricted increases, and the number of game media used in each game increases until the specific number is reached. minus the number of uses may be less. On the other hand, as described above, since it is easier to move to the specific game state by the specific means, events that are not favorable for the player, such as the restriction of the transition lottery and the decrease in the number of winning This will lead to a favorable event, and it is possible to realize an interesting game property in which the player's feeling of regret is used to increase his or her joy.

Feature B3. Equipped with game medium setting means (credit insertion switches 56 to 58) for setting the number of game media to be used for each game,
A special number (3) of game media is set by the game medium setting means to win the payout result in each game, and the special number of game media is set by the game medium setting means. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the specific result can be won in each game.

According to the above configuration, the number of game media used in the game with the payout result and the number of game media used in the game with the specific result are common, and in the payout state when the game with the specific result occurs, The effect of reducing the number of acquisitions is conspicuous. In such a configuration, if it is configured that a specific result can be won during the payout state, an event that the player does not like, such as a decrease in the number of winnings, can be favorably followed by an event such as a transition to a specific game state. can.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein the predetermined specified result is a replay result.

According to the above configuration, the number of games required to reach the specific number is extended by replaying during the payout state. Therefore, it is possible to expect the excellent effect of the feature B2 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature B5. the predetermined payout result and the predetermined specific result are overlapping results that can be won;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined stop operation mode, winning of the predetermined payout result is established, and each of the stop operation means is operated in a specific stop operation mode different from the predetermined stop operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, wherein when operated, winning of the predetermined specific result is established.

According to the above configuration, the payout result and the specific result are overlapping results in which the winning result differs depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and the specific result winning makes it easier to shift to the specific game state. Since it is as described above, effort is put into the stop operation of each game in the payout state. Therefore, the playability during the payout state is dramatically improved.

Feature B6. the predetermined payout result that is the target of the duplicate result is the first result;
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the predetermined specific result that is the target of the duplicate result is the second result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to vary the number of payouts in each game during the payout state by using the first result and the second result, which are the targets of the mode notification. In this way, there is no need to set a new combination configuration for the payout state, and the configuration can be simplified.

Feature B7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result in the normal game state, and when the duplicate result is won in the payout state based on the transition result, the mode notification by the mode notification means is performed at a first frequency. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result in the specific game state, and the duplicate result is won in the payout state based on the transition result, the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the first frequency. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the gaming machine is executed at a high second frequency.

According to the above configuration, even if the payout state is the same, in the normal game state, it becomes a priming for the transition to the specific game state, and in the specific game state, it becomes a state in which acquisition of game media can be expected. A state in which different effects can be expected depending on the situation can be realized in the same payout state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability with a relatively simple configuration without using a complicated configuration such as providing a payout state for each situation.

Feature B8. A first payout state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined payout result is a first probability, and a probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined payout result are different from the first probability. A second payout state with a second probability is set,
The ending means terminates the first payout state when the number of game media paid out by the payout means reaches the specific number in the first payout state, and the payout in the second payout state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the second payout state is terminated when the number of game media paid out by means reaches the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the first payout state and the second payout state have different probabilities of a predetermined payout result, although the number of payouts that trigger the end is a specific number. Therefore, the number of games to be played until the end may differ between the first payout state and the second payout state. By applying such a configuration to feature B1, the easiness of transition to the specific game state based on the number of games played will differ between the first payout state and the second payout state, and the same termination trigger will occur. Even in the payout state, it has a completely different property in terms of ease of transition to the specific game state, and can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature B9. As the payout state, a target payout state (restricted bonus) subject to restriction of execution of the transition lottery by the limiting means, and a non-target payout state (non-restricted Target bonus) is set,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the target payout state is the predetermined payout result is common to the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined payout result in the non-target payout state. The game machine according to any one of the characterizing features B1 to B8.

According to the above configuration, the target payout state in which the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific game state is restricted and the non-target payout state in which the execution is not restricted are set, so that the player who expects the transition to the specific game state On the other hand, the type of payout state can be of great interest. In addition, since the probability of a payout result is common in any payout state, it is difficult to determine which payout state it is from the appearance rate of the payout result. By doing so, a game is added to predict whether or not execution of the lottery for transition to the specific game state is restricted in the payout state, thereby diversifying the game.

Feature B10. The terminating means terminates the target payout state when the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the target payout state reaches the specific number, and the payout means in the non-target payout state The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the non-target payout state is terminated when the number of paid out game media reaches the specific number.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature B9, the upper limit number of payouts is the same, so the number of games executed during these payout states can be about the same. Therefore, even if the transition to the specific game state occurs in the same number of games played, is the transition to the specific game state caused by the number of games played after limiting the lottery for transition to the specific game state? It becomes difficult to understand whether the transition to the specific game state has occurred without restricting the lottery for the transition to the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the transition route to the specific game state and increase the interest of the game.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for each game based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (advantageous section) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state are provided,
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (function for executing AT mode lottery processing by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result (first BB, second BB, RB) for transitioning to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position. Advantageous transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of shifting the game state to the advantageous state based on what has been done;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the result of the transition, a retaining means (a function of executing the process of setting the carry-over state by the main controller 101) that can retain the result of the transition until the transition to the advantageous state;
The lottery result of the transition lottery executed by the transition lottery means in the specific game after the end of the advantageous state can be identified in the game before the specific game (step S3305 by the display control device 81, a function to execute processing such as step S3308);
Special notification execution means (function of executing processing such as steps S3306 and S3309 by the display control device 81) capable of executing special notification corresponding to the identification result by the destination identification means at least before the advantageous state ends )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a payout means pays out a predetermined number of game media if the number corresponds to the result of the lottery, a case where a first result winning is realized and a second result is realized by a stop operation mode of the stop operation means. As a result, winning may be established, and the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the presence or absence of mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Furthermore, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the player may shift to an advantageous state, and the interlocking of the transition to the advantageous state and the state notification allows the acquisition of a large amount of game media. is realized.

Moreover, in such game characteristics, the result of the lottery for transition to the specific game state executed in the specific game after the end of the advantageous state is specified before the specific game, and the special notification corresponding to the specified result is provided. may be executed before the end of the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to increase the relevance between the advantageous state and the specific game state and improve the amusement of the game by creating a sense of anticipation for the execution of the special notification in the advantageous state. .

Feature C2. Limiting means for limiting execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means in the advantageous state (function for executing processing such as step S3202 by the main controller 101);
a specific lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S3209 by the main controller 101) capable of executing a specific lottery corresponding to the transition lottery restricted by the limit means in the specific game;
with
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the destination specifying means specifies a result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted during the advantageous state, and the specific lottery corresponding to the transition lottery subject to the restriction is performed in the specific game. Since the result of the specific lottery is performed as a special notification during the advantageous state, even if the shift lottery is not performed in the advantageous state, it can be seen as if it is being performed. By doing so, it is possible to suitably produce a game performance using the advantageous state and the special state without increasing the degree of advantage during the advantageous state too much and without diminishing interest in the special state during the advantageous state. can be done.

Feature C3. Transition notification means (function of executing setting processing of bonus winning notification effect by display control device 81) capable of executing transition notification that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result by a predetermined notification means. ,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the special notification execution means can execute the special notification when the transition notification is performed by the transition notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the transition notification that the winning result is obtained as a result of the transition is performed, the result of the transition lottery performed in the specific game after the advantageous state based on the transition result is notified as the special notification. By doing so, it is possible to know the situation regarding the specific game state after the advantageous state before shifting to the advantageous state, and it is possible to make novel notification contents.

Feature C4. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the fact that a lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result,
A second special notification executing means (processing such as step S3507 by the display control device 81) capable of executing the second special notification corresponding to the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result at least before the advantageous state ends A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the above configuration, the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result may be notified in a situation (before the advantageous state ends) in which special notification is performed by the special notification executing means. By doing so, it is possible to make the special notification by the special notification executing means appear to be notification corresponding to the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result. In more detail, even if the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result does not correspond to the transition to the specific game state, or the transition lottery itself is not performed, the result of the transition lottery will be transferred by special notification. It is possible to make them think that they correspond to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the advantage (lottery probability) in the transition lottery based on the transition result seem higher than it actually is.

Feature C5. Characteristic feature C4, characterized in that the game in which the special notification can be executed by the special notification execution means and the game in which the second special notification can be executed by the second special notification execution means are common. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the special information appear to be the second special information and making the second special information seem to be the special information.

Feature C6. The notification mode of the special notification by the special notification execution means when the identification result by the destination identification means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, and the result of the transition lottery based on the transition result is the above. Characteristic C4 or Characteristic C5 characterized in that the notification mode of the second special notification by the second special notification execution means in the case of the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state is common. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the special information appear to be the second special information and making the second special information seem to be the special information.

Feature C7. comprehension means for comprehending the stop number in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result (function for executing winning result corresponding processing for winning game by main control device 101),
The special notification executing means is capable of executing the special notification by the special notification executing means at a first timing when the result grasped by the grasping means is the result of the first stop roll, and When the comprehension result is a result of a second stop number different from the first stop number, the special notification by the special notification execution means can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the special notification may differ depending on the stop result of the game that is won as a transition result. By doing so, the player can select the execution timing of the special notification by his/her own operation. For example, if a player can obtain some kind of useful information (for example, an estimate of a set value) depending on the execution timing of the special notification, it is expected that the player will actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game will be improved.

Feature C8. As the transition results, a first transition result in which execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means during the advantageous state is restricted, and a second transition result in which execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means during the advantageous state is not restricted. having a transition result and
A stop roll in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first transition result can be the first stop roll,
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the stop roll in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second shift result can be the second stop roll.

According to the above configuration, it is understood that if the stop roll in the game in which the transition result is won is the first stop roll, the subsequent execution of the transition lottery in an advantageous state is restricted, and the second stop roll is determined. If there is an eye, it is understood that the subsequent execution of the transition lottery in the advantageous state is not restricted. In addition, since it is possible to make the special notification corresponding to the result of the transition lottery executed in the specific game after the end of the advantageous state different between the first timing and the second timing, the special notification is the advantageous state. The user can enjoy the special notification while grasping to some extent whether it corresponds to the result of the transition lottery in the middle or the result of the transition lottery executed in the specific game. Moreover, in this way, even if the result of the transition lottery performed in the specific game after the advantageous state is pseudo-notified during the advantageous state, the pseudo-effect can be obtained. It is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment caused by being executed after being aware that is pseudo.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery for each game based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
As the game state, at least a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (advantageous section) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal game state are provided,
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (function for executing AT mode lottery processing by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific game state (the winning result corresponding processing by the main controller 101 is executed function) and
Grasping means capable of grasping specific information corresponding to the number of times the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is limited or the number of games executed in the restricted situation (grasping the transition lottery limit counter by the main controller 101) function to perform processing) and
Based on the specific information grasped by the grasping means, a specific lottery means capable of executing a specific grant lottery of whether or not to give a specific privilege to the player (processes such as steps S3209 and S4016 by the main controller 101) functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a payout means pays out a predetermined number of game media if the number corresponds to the result of the lottery, a case where a first result winning is realized and a second result is realized by a stop operation mode of the stop operation means. As a result, winning may be established, and the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the presence or absence of mode notification regarding the stop operation mode.

When transitioning to the specific game state through the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, the mode notification is likely to be executed, but the transition lottery may be restricted in the gaming machine. For example, the bonus state, the carry-over state of the bonus, etc. correspond to this, and by restricting the transition lottery in these states, it is possible to suppress the increase in the ball payout rate, and for example, to prevent the bonus prize from being established. It is possible to ensure fairness between a player who can perform an operation to make the game and a player who cannot.

However, if such a transition lottery is restricted, the player may have the impression that the transition lottery opportunity has been exploited. Therefore, in the above configuration, there is a case where a lottery is performed as to whether or not to grant a specific privilege based on specific information corresponding to the limited number of times of transition lottery and the number of games executed in a situation where the transition lottery is limited. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the user has been exploited as described above. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can meet the demands of the players.

Feature D2. The grasping means includes a destination specifying means (a function of executing processing such as step S3305 and step S3308 by the display control device 81) that can specify the specified information before the transfer lottery is restricted,
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific lottery means can execute the specific grant lottery based on the specific information specified by the destination specifying means.

According to the above configuration, the specific information corresponding to the limited number of times or the number of games may be specified before the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is limited, and the specific privilege is based on the specific information. grant lottery can be held. In other words, before the transfer lottery is limited, a lottery may be performed based on the limited number of times, etc., and a novel game property is realized in which the future transfer lottery limit is drawn in advance. be able to.

Feature D3. Special notification execution means (function of executing the processing of steps S3306 and S3309 by the display control device 81) capable of executing special notification corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery means before the transition lottery is restricted. The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, not only is the limit lottery for the future transition lottery drawn in advance, but also the result of the lottery in advance is notified before the limit. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the restriction. It is possible to play the game without being particularly conscious of the events that occur.

Feature D4. an execution lottery means (a function of executing a drop lottery in CZ mode by the main control unit 101) for executing a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the transition lottery by the transition lottery means;
Second grasping means capable of grasping second specific information corresponding to the number of times the execution lottery by the execution lottery means is limited or the number of games executed in the restricted situation (falling lottery limit by main controller 101 a function to execute processing to grasp the counter);
a specific process executing means (a function of executing a process such as step S4013 by the main controller 101) capable of executing a specific process based on the second specific information grasped by the second grasping means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized by comprising:

There are cases where the execution lottery of the transition lottery is restricted, and if the transition lottery is restricted, the execution lottery is also limited, and the specific grant lottery is based only on the number of times the transition lottery is limited. If you do, there is a possibility that the specific award lottery will be performed based on the number of times including the part that was not actually executed. Therefore, in the above configuration, specific processing is performed based on the second specific information corresponding to the limited number of times the execution lottery is performed. For example, if this specific process is reflected in the specific grant lottery, it is possible to make a lottery corresponding to the number of times the transfer lottery is actually limited. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the game while preventing an increase in the payout rate, etc., without increasing the player's advantage too much.

Feature D5. Based on the second identification information grasped by the second grasping means, the specific process execution means controls the number of times the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted or the number of games executed in the restricted situation. executing the specific process of subtracting the number of times the transition lottery was not executed or the number of games executed in the situation where the transition lottery was not executed from,
The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the specific lottery means executes the specific grant lottery based on information after execution of the specific processing.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature D4 in the case of performing the lottery excluding the portion that was not executed by the execution lottery.

Feature D6. The specific process executing means performs a second specific grant lottery for determining whether or not to give the player a second specific privilege (setting suggestion effect A) based on the second specific information grasped by the second grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5, characterized in that it is capable of executing

According to the above configuration, the second specific privilege may be granted based on the limited number of times of execution lottery. In this case, the lower the limit of the number of execution lotteries, the more the transition lottery is performed. Therefore, it can be said that the smaller the limit of the number of execution lotteries, the better for the player who wants to obtain the specific privilege. Conversely, the higher the limited number of execution lotteries, the less the transfer lottery is performed. Therefore, it can be said that the larger the limit number of execution lotteries, the better for the player who wants to obtain the second special privilege. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which a privilege is given according to the limit number of times of the execution lottery and the limit number of times of the transfer lottery, which are in conflicting relation, it is possible to make the player think that it is preferable even if the number of times of limit increases.

Feature D7. A setting means (function for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) for setting a set value in multiple stages that can change the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the game medium,
The specific privilege is to generate a first suggestive effect as to which set value is set among the set values of the plurality of stages,
The second specific privilege is to generate a second suggestive effect as to which set value is set among the set values of the plurality of stages,
The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the ranges or contents of set values suggested by the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are different.

According to the above configuration, the first suggestive effect is generated when the specific privilege is awarded, and the second suggestive effect is generated when the second specific privilege is awarded. The first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect differ in the range of suggested setting values, and the easiness of prediction in predicting the set values from the suggestive effect may differ. In some cases, setting values can be narrowed down by combining effects. In other words, the player will be happy if either of the benefits is awarded, but will be troubled if only one of them is awarded. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize a new game property using the number of times the execution lottery is limited and the number of times the transition lottery is limited.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the specific lottery means executes the transfer lottery as the specific privilege.

According to the above configuration, a novel configuration is achieved in which the transition lottery is further performed according to the limited number of times of the transition lottery. By doing so, by restricting the transition lottery, the effect of not giving the impression that the execution opportunity of the transition lottery is exploited is enhanced.

Feature D9. If the specific information is information corresponding to the fact that the number of times the transition lottery is limited or the number of games executed in the limited situation is a specific number or more, the specific grant lottery is performed without the The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to provide a specific privilege.

According to the above configuration, if the number of times the transfer lottery limit is equal to or greater than a specific number, the specific privilege is granted without going through the specific grant lottery. It is possible to suitably avoid such an event that the processing load increases as the number of restricted times increases.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature groups A to D to each configuration of the feature group A to feature group D detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled by inserting a game ball through the above.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

means capable of updating specific information corresponding to the number of games executed in a predetermined specific state according to the progress of the game;
means capable of giving a privilege to a player when the specific information becomes special information corresponding to a predetermined specific number of games;
means capable of executing a determination process for terminating the specific state in the game executed in the specific state;
with
When the game result of the game executed in the specific state is a transition result that enables transition to a predetermined transition state, the specific information is not updated in the game until transition to the transition state. it is possible,
When the game result of the game executed in the specific state is the transition result, the determination process is not executed in the game until transition to the transition state,
A game machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a specific notification in a game up to transition to the transition state when the transition result is obtained.

Images